WO2004043493A1 - Prodrugs built as multiple self-elimination-release spacers - Google Patents

Prodrugs built as multiple self-elimination-release spacers Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2004043493A1
WO2004043493A1 PCT/NL2003/000804 NL0300804W WO2004043493A1 WO 2004043493 A1 WO2004043493 A1 WO 2004043493A1 NL 0300804 W NL0300804 W NL 0300804W WO 2004043493 A1 WO2004043493 A1 WO 2004043493A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
spacer
group
compound according
release
multiple release
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/NL2003/000804
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Franciscus Marinus Hendrikus De Groot
Patrick Henry Beusker
Johannes Wilhelm Scheeren
Original Assignee
Syntarga B.V.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Syntarga B.V. filed Critical Syntarga B.V.
Priority to US10/534,777 priority Critical patent/US7705045B2/en
Priority to AU2003282624A priority patent/AU2003282624A1/en
Priority to CA002506080A priority patent/CA2506080A1/en
Priority to EP03774383A priority patent/EP1560599A1/en
Priority to JP2004551297A priority patent/JP2006507322A/en
Publication of WO2004043493A1 publication Critical patent/WO2004043493A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C271/00—Derivatives of carbamic acids, i.e. compounds containing any of the groups, the nitrogen atom not being part of nitro or nitroso groups
    • C07C271/06—Esters of carbamic acids
    • C07C271/08—Esters of carbamic acids having oxygen atoms of carbamate groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms
    • C07C271/26—Esters of carbamic acids having oxygen atoms of carbamate groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms with the nitrogen atom of at least one of the carbamate groups bound to a carbon atom of a six-membered aromatic ring
    • C07C271/28—Esters of carbamic acids having oxygen atoms of carbamate groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms with the nitrogen atom of at least one of the carbamate groups bound to a carbon atom of a six-membered aromatic ring to a carbon atom of a non-condensed six-membered aromatic ring
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/54—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound
    • A61K47/555—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an organic compound pre-targeting systems involving an organic compound, other than a peptide, protein or antibody, for targeting specific cells
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/62—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being a protein, peptide or polyamino acid
    • A61K47/65—Peptidic linkers, binders or spacers, e.g. peptidic enzyme-labile linkers
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/62—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being a protein, peptide or polyamino acid
    • A61K47/66—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being a protein, peptide or polyamino acid the modifying agent being a pre-targeting system involving a peptide or protein for targeting specific cells
    • A61K47/67—Enzyme prodrug therapy, e.g. gene directed enzyme drug therapy [GDEPT] or VDEPT
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K47/00—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient
    • A61K47/50—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates
    • A61K47/51—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent
    • A61K47/68—Medicinal preparations characterised by the non-active ingredients used, e.g. carriers or inert additives; Targeting or modifying agents chemically bound to the active ingredient the non-active ingredient being chemically bound to the active ingredient, e.g. polymer-drug conjugates the non-active ingredient being a modifying agent the modifying agent being an antibody, an immunoglobulin or a fragment thereof, e.g. an Fc-fragment
    • A61K47/6891—Pre-targeting systems involving an antibody for targeting specific cells
    • A61K47/6899—Antibody-Directed Enzyme Prodrug Therapy [ADEPT]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B82—NANOTECHNOLOGY
    • B82Y—SPECIFIC USES OR APPLICATIONS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MEASUREMENT OR ANALYSIS OF NANOSTRUCTURES; MANUFACTURE OR TREATMENT OF NANOSTRUCTURES
    • B82Y5/00—Nanobiotechnology or nanomedicine, e.g. protein engineering or drug delivery
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07K—PEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04—Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/08—Tripeptides
    • C07K5/0802—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/0804—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • C07K5/0806—Tripeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic the side chain containing 0 or 1 carbon atoms, i.e. Gly, Ala

Definitions

  • This invention is directed to compounds or prodrugs comprising a multiple release spacer or spacer system.
  • a multiple release spacer is defined as a self-elimination spacer that releases multiple leaving groups upon a single activation event.
  • One or more (generations) of these multiple release spacers can be used for example to obtain conjugates or prodrugs which are activated by a single activation step at the preferred site of action in order to selectively deliver multiple therapeutic or diagnostic parent moieties to target cells or to a target site.
  • target cells are tumor cells.
  • chemotherapeutic agents Lack of selectivity of chemotherapeutic agents is a major problem in cancer treatment. Because highly toxic compounds are used in cancer chemotherapy, it is typically associated with severe side effects. Drug concentrations that would completely eradicate the tumor cannot be reached because of dose-limiting side effects such as gastrointestinal tract and bone marrow toxicity. In addition, tumors can develop resistance against anticancer agents after prolonged treatment. In modern drug development, targeting of cytotoxic drugs to the tumor site can be considered one of the primary goals.
  • a promising approach to obtain selectivity for tumor cells or tumor tissue is to exploit the existence of tumor-associated enzymes.
  • a relatively high level of tumor-specific enzyme can convert a pharmacologically inactive prodrug to the corresponding active parent drug in the vicinity of or inside the tumor. Via this concept a high concentration of toxic anticancer agent can be generated at the tumor site. All tumor cells may be killed if the dose is sufficiently high, which may decrease development of drug resistant tumor cells.
  • proteolytic enzymes There are several enzymes that are present at elevated levels in certain tumor tissues.
  • One example is the enzyme ⁇ -glucuronidase, which is liberated from certain necrotic . tumor areas.
  • proteolytic enzymes have been shown to be associated with tumor invasion and metastasis.
  • proteases like for example the cathepsins and proteases from the urokinase-type plasminogen activator (u-PA) system are all involved in tumor metastasis.
  • the serine protease plasmin plays a key role in tumor invasion and metastasis.
  • the proteolytically active form of plasmin is formed from its inactive pro-enzyme form plasminogen by u-PA.
  • the rumor-associated presence of plasmin can be exploited for targeting of plasmin-cleavable conjugates or prodrugs.
  • An enzyme can also be transported to the vicinity of or inside target cells or target tissue via antibody-directed enzyme prodrug therapy (ADEPT) 1 , polymer-directed enzyme prodrug therapy (PDEPT) or macromolecular-directed enzyme prodrug therapy (MDEPT) , virus-directed enzyme prodrug therapy (VDEPT) or gene-directed enzyme prodrug therapy (GDEPT) 4 .
  • ADPT antibody-directed enzyme prodrug therapy
  • PDEPT polymer-directed enzyme prodrug therapy
  • MDEPT macromolecular-directed enzyme prodrug therapy
  • VDEPT virus-directed enzyme prodrug therapy
  • GDEPT gene-directed enzyme prodrug therapy
  • the technology of this invention relates to novel spacers (linkers) or spacer systems (linker systems) that can be inserted between a specifier (unit that can be cleaved or transformed) and leaving groups (for example parent drugs or detectable molecules). Furthermore, the invention relates to prodrugs and (bio)conjugates comprising a specifier, said novel spacers or spacer systems and multiple leaving groups, and to bifunctional linker systems comprising a (protected) specifier containing a reactive moiety that enables coupling to a targeting moiety on one side of the linker (system) and reactive moieties that enable coupling to multiple leaving groups (for example parent drugs or detectable molecules) on the other side of the linker (system).
  • a great number of anticancer conjugates and prodrugs that have been developed in the past contain a self-eliminating connector or linker, also called self-elimination spacer.
  • This spacer is incorporated between the specifier and the drug in order to facilitate enzymatic cleavage and so enhance the kinetics of drug release (as shown in figure 1).
  • the specifier (which for example can be an oligopeptide substrate for a protease or for example a ⁇ -glucuronide substrate for ⁇ -glucuronidase) must be site-specifically removed or transformed, followed by a spontaneous spacer elimination to release the cytotoxic parent drug.
  • WO 98/13059 is a relevant disclosure describing a prodrug comprising an amino- terminal capped peptide covalently linked to a therapeutic drug through a self- eliminating spacer.
  • this document describes the use of -aminobenzyl- oxycarbonyl (PABC) as self-eliminating spacer.
  • PABC -aminobenzyl- oxycarbonyl
  • the PABC electronic cascade spacer was already known from for instance Carl et al., J. Med. Chem., 1981, vol. 24, 479- 480. Specifically the anticancer drugs doxorubicin, mitomycin C, paclitaxel and camptothecin coupled to PABC are described.
  • this spacer is described in this disclosure as a bis- carbamate, which teaches that two drag molecules are linked to this spacer via an amine functionality of the drag.
  • the only drug moiety that is disclosed that is actually coupled to the BHMS spacer is doxorubicin. Doxorubicin is coupled via its sugar amino group resulting in a carbamate linkage between spacer and drug. Further it is stated that the spacer can bind two drug moieties. However, the document is silent on how many drag molecules are actually released.
  • prodrugs or (bio-)conjugates in terms of (efficiency of) release of sufficient amounts of active drag in relation to the activation that is required at a desired site of action.
  • the present invention fulfills the above mentioned need with a compound comprising a specifier (V) linked to two or more of the same or different leaving groups (Z) via a self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system, which compound upon a single activation step releases at least two leaving groups, said activation step being the removal or transformation of the specifier.
  • Self-elimination spacers can also be coupled to one another, so that more than one spacer is incorporated between specifier and leaving group.
  • the term (self-elimination) spacer system is used, which comprises two or more spacers, being either self-eliminating multiple release or single release spacers, connected together.
  • the present invention also describes bifunctional linker systems comprising a
  • the bifunctional linker systems comprise reactive moieties that enable coupling to multiple leaving groups (for example parent drags or detectable molecules).
  • Figure 1 shows schematically the conversion of a spacer containing prodrug into the parent drag.
  • Figure 2 shows schematically the liberation of multiple leaving group molecules from multiple release spacer contaniing compounds.
  • Figure 3 shows schematically the liberation of 4 leaving group molecules from a compound containing 2 generations of double release spacers.
  • Figure 4 shows schematically the liberation of 9 leaving group molecules from a compound containing 2 generations of triple release spacers.
  • Figure 5 shows the principle of 1,6-elimination.
  • Figure 6 shows the principle of 1,8-elimination.
  • Figure 7 shows the proposed principle of elimination of 3 leaving groups from a triple release spacer.
  • Figure 8 shows the proposed principle of elimination of 2 leaving groups from a double release spacer.
  • Figure 9 shows the preparation of 2 model compounds containing a triple release spacer and 3 benzyl alcohol or phenethyl alcohol leaving groups.
  • Figure 10 shows the preparation of a model compound containing a triple release spacer and 3 benzylamine leaving groups.
  • Figure 11 shows the preparation of a model compound containing a triple release spacer and 3 propylamine leaving groups.
  • Figure 12 shows the preparation of a prodrug containing a double release spacer and 2 paclitaxel moieties.
  • Figure 13 shows the preparation of a prodrug containing two generations of double release spacers and 4 paclitaxel moieties.
  • Figure 14 shows the preparation of a model compound containing a double release spacer and 2 benzylamine leaving groups.
  • Figure 15 shows the preparation of a doubly p-nitrophenyl carbonate activated compound containing a double release spacer coupled to two single release spacers.
  • Figure 16 shows the preparation of 3 model compounds containing a double release spacer coupled to two single release spacers.
  • Figure 17 shows the preparation of a model compound containing a single release spacer coupled to benzylamine.
  • Figure 18 shows the reference compounds dibenzyl carbonate and 2'-O-cinnamyl oxycarbonylpaclitaxel.
  • Figure 19 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the 2 model compounds containing
  • Figure 20 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the model compound containing 3 benzylamine leaving groups.
  • Figure 21 shows the removal of the Aloe group from the model compound containing 3 propylamine leaving groups.
  • Figure 22 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the prodrug containing 2 paclitaxel moieties with the concomitant liberation of 2 molecules of paclitaxel.
  • Figure 23 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the prodrag containing 4 paclitaxel moieties with the concomitant liberation of 4 molecules of paclitaxel.
  • Figure 24 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the model compound containing 2 benzylamine leaving groups.
  • Figure 25 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the 2 model compounds containing 2 p-methoxybenzylamine or 2 p-chlorobenzylamine leaving groups.
  • Figure 26 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the model compound containing 2 phenethyl alcohol moieties with the concomitant liberation of 2 molecules of phenethyl alcohol.
  • Figure 27 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the model compound containing a benzylamine leaving group, with the concomitant liberation of benzylamine.
  • Figure 28 shows the treatment of two reference compounds with zinc and acetic acid, which does not lead to any degradation of starting material.
  • a new technology is disclosed that can be used to induce release of more than one leaving group following a single activation step. It can be applied for example to prepare prodrugs or conjugates, which can for example be used for targeting drags to disease-related or organ-specific tissue or cells, for example tumor- specific conjugates or prodrugs that are improved with respect to conjugates or prodrugs known thus far in that they release more than one parent moiety after a single activation step.
  • This aims at a therapeutic advantage.
  • the present invention is deemed to be applicable to all drags that need to be delivered at a specific target site where a specific disease-related or specifically targeted biomolecule can convert the prodrag or conjugate into drags or induce conversion of the prodrag or conjugate into drags.
  • This invention can furthermore find application in (non-specific) controlled release of compounds, with the aim of enhancing characteristics of parent moiety release.
  • this invention can find application in a diagnostic assay process.
  • An enzyme can be detected by a compound of this invention containing a multiple release spacer or spacer system that is selectively activated by said enzyme to release multiple detectable molecules (leaving groups), thus increasing the sensitivity of the assay.
  • self-elimination multiple release spacers are disclosed that enable release of multiple leaving group molecules upon a single activation event. These self- elimination multiple release spacers are applicable in conjugates or prodrugs, for example anticancer prodrugs, and significantly enhance the amount of drag molecules liberated per (enzymatic) activation, resulting in a potential therapeutic advantage.
  • a line ending in space indicates the position of attachment of another structural element of the compound or conjugate. This includes attachment to V, S or Z.
  • the stractures or parts thereof have been drawn, under the assumption that the stractures are read from left to right, meaning that the specifier V is always located on the left side and the leaving groups Z or the reactive moieties S are always located on the right side of such stractures.
  • two 'branched self-elimination spacers' herein also called 'multiple release spacers', have been developed that are able to release multiple moieties. Spacers that are able to release only a single moiety are called 'unbranched spacers' or 'single release spacers'.
  • double release spacer When a spacer able to release 2 leaving groups, hereinbelow called “double release spacer”, is used between specifier and leaving groups, two leaving group molecules are released per (enzymatic) activation (figure 2a). When a spacer able to release 3 leaving groups, hereinbelow called “triple release spacer”, is used, three leaving group molecules will be released per activated compound or prodrag (figure 2b).
  • 'spacer system' When a spacer is connected to one or more other spacers via a direct bond, this combination of spacers is referred to as 'spacer system'. When at least one of these spacers is a multiple release spacer, it is called a 'multiple release spacer system'.
  • An aniline-based spacer is a multiple release or single release spacer that comprises an aromatic amino group on the left-hand side.
  • a phenol- or thiophenol-based spacer is a multiple release or single release spacer that comprises an aromatic hydroxy or thio group, respectively on the lefthand side.
  • Lefthand side refers to the position in the molecule as shown in e.g. figures 5, 6, 7 and 8.
  • the leaving groups are not aliphatic amine groups when only an aniline-based multiple release spacer is employed.
  • the leaving groups (Z) should not be coupled to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer via their aliphatic amine groups if the spacer is an aniline-based multiple release spacer.
  • the leaving group Z is propylamine, p- methoxybenzylamine, benzylamine, or p-chlorobenzylamine, coupled via its primary amine group, maximally one of these leaving groups is actually released (see examples 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 / figures 20, 21, 24, and 25).
  • the leaving groups can also be coupled via their aliphatic amino group as all leaving groups are liberated upon activation.
  • the leaving groups Z are linked to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer via a group that possesses sufficient electron-withdrawing capacity, such as for example O, S, aromatic N, or aliphatic N.
  • aromatic N is meant a nitrogen atom covalently bound to an aromatic group such as for instance a (substituted) phenyl ring or other (hetero)aromatic group, but also aromatic N can mean a nitrogen in an aromatic ring such as for instance in a pyrrole ring or in an imidazole ring.
  • the leaving groups must possess better leaving group capabilities than aliphatic amines when the multiple release spacer is an aniline-based spacer.
  • aliphatic amines are also suitable leaving groups and release of all aliphatic amine leaving groups does occur.
  • the leaving group should be coupled via its oxygen, such as for example its primary, secondary or tertiary alcohol, its phenol, or its phosphate, its sulphur, or its aromatic amine.
  • the spacer should be a phenol- or thiophenol-based multiple release spacer or the spacer system comprising one aniline-based multiple release spacer should also comprise single release phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers directly connected to this multiple release spacer.
  • the linkage between self-eliminating multiple release spacer (system) and leaving group can be described as carbonate, alkyl phosphate, oxycarbonylthio, carbamate, or N-aryl-carbamate.
  • the leaving group can also be linked to the spacer without an oxycarbonyl unit without compromising self-elimination.
  • the compound comprises one self-eliminating multiple release spacer. In a further embodiment the compound comprises two or more self-eliminating multiple release spacers. In yet a further embodiment the compound comprises three or more self-eliminating multiple release spacers.
  • the self-elimination multiple release spacers can also be coupled to one another (figures 3 and 4). h this case compounds are obtained that contain multiple generations of multiple release spacers. If one multiple release spacer is incorporated in the spacer system of the compound according to the invention, the compound contains one generation of multiple release spacer. If two or more self-eliminating multiple release spacers are coupled to a first self-eliminating multiple release spacer, the resulting compound contains two generations of multiple release spacers (second generation).
  • the resulting compound contains three generations of multiple release spacers (third generation). If a compound according to the invention contains two or more generations of self-eliminating multiple release spacers, the compound possesses a dendritic (or dendrimeric) stracture and can be called a dendrimer. In one embodiment of the invention the compound comprises one self-eliminating multiple release spacer. In a further embodiment of the invention the compound comprises two or more generations of self-eliminating multiple release spacers.
  • the compound comprises three or more generations of self-eliminating multiple release spacers. For instance by coupling two self-elimination double release spacers to a first self-elimination double release spacer and optionally again coupling of four self-elimination double release spacers to the second two self-elimination double release spacers, a dendritic stracture is constructed.
  • the number of leaving group molecules, for example drag molecules, that can be bound per specifier is multiplied with every generation of self-elimination multiple release spacers incorporated.
  • Each new generation of self-elimination multiple release spacers that is coupled to the preceding generation multiplies the number of leaving group molecules that can eventually be present in the compound or conjugate by a factor that is equal to the number of leaving groups that can be bound to the multiple release spacer of the generation that is newly incorporated.
  • the final compound or prodrag (or bioconjugate) that is obtained is a dendrimer.
  • the compound comprises a self- eliminating multiple release spacer system in the form of a dendritic stracture.
  • the leaving groups should be coupled via their oxygen, such as for example their primary, secondary or tertiary alcohol, their phenol, or their phosphate, their sulphur, or their aromatic amine.
  • At least one generation of the dendritic multiple release spacer system should comprise phenol- or thiophenol-based multiple release spacers or should be coupled to the next generation of multiple release spacers or to the leaving groups via single release phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers .
  • the highest generation of multiple release spacers or spacer systems should be phenol- or thiophenol-based.
  • the leaving groups are not aliphatic amines, but preferably for example O, S or aromatic N.
  • Dendrimers also known as starburst polymers, are well-defined highly branched treelike macromolecules with a large number of end groups 12 .
  • One application of dendrimeric (or dendritic) stractures that has been explored is drug delivery .
  • biologically active substances can be covalently linked to dendrimeric end groups, or can be encapsulated inside dendrimers.
  • each drag molecule must be independently liberated via a chemical or biological cleavage step 14 .
  • specific physiological conditions need to change the folding and/or tertiary stracture of the dendrimer, thereby releasing encapsulated material. Release of active substances from dendrimers can be induced by pH 15 , incorporation of photosensitive units , or by enzymatic cleavage .
  • novel self-elimination multiple release spacers disclosed herein enable complete release of multiple leaving groups, for example biologically active substances, that are covalently linked to the dendrimeric end groups in such a way that a single activation is sufficient to release all end groups (figures 3 and 4).
  • a single chemical or biological activating event should lead to a cascade of self-elimination reactions thereby releasing multiple leaving groups.
  • Dendrimers with these properties may be useful for several applications, and are considered particularly useful in the area of diagnostics and the area of drag delivery, for example in anticancer therapy, where tumor-selective degradation of the dendrimeric material is desired.
  • Multiple drag molecules can be site-specifically released by employment of only one targeting or drug delivery device.
  • Compounds that contain two or more generations of multiple release self-elimination spacers, optionally connected to each other via single release spacers or spacer systems are further called 'cascade dendrimers'.
  • bioactive compounds can be site- specifically delivered.
  • the concept can be applied to anticancer agents, but also antibiotics can be incorporated as end groups in a cascade dendrimer that is activated for example by bacterial enzymes, such as for example ⁇ -lactamase.
  • cascade dendrimers may be applicable in the agrochemical field for release of pesticides .
  • cascade dendrimers may be prepared that contain two or more different parent compounds. This may be interesting when it is considered that combination therapy emerges as a clinically important mode of treatment for diseases such as cancer, bacterial diseases, and HIN.
  • biodegradable dendrimers might be interesting for the production of biodegradable materials such as plastics, or may be used as devices that enable the controlled or slow release of drags by incorporation of, for example, an enzymatically degradable sequence.
  • cascade dendrimers may be used for diagnostic purposes 19 . They could serve as an amplification mechanism in diagnostic assays, see hereinbelow.
  • a prodrag is an inactive derivative of an active drag, which is site-specifically activated to release the active parent drag.
  • Prodrugs that are activated by tumor-specific or tumor-targeted enzymes have shown promising results 22 .
  • prodrugs of antitumor agents coupled to polymers as already reported by Ringsdorf 23 , provide another targeting principle. Polymers, including dendrimers, can passively lead to tumor-specificity, due to the enhanced permeability and retention effect (EPR) 24 .
  • EPR enhanced permeability and retention effect
  • poly-HPMA poly[N-(2-hydroxypropyl)methacrylamide]
  • poly-glutamic acid for example poly-L-glutamic acid (PG)
  • PEG poly(ethylene) glycol
  • dendrimers in drug delivery can be preferred to other polymers because, by definition, dendrimers are not as polydisperse as conventional polymers. In general, they can be obtained as homogeneous compounds more easily than polymers, a fact that may facilitate approval of dendrimeric material for medicinal purposes.
  • cascade dendrimers over conventional dendrimers or polymers would be that they would be selectively degradable, thus clearable from the body. Clearance of polymers from the body is a limiting factor in current polymeric drag delivery systems, as the maximum molecular weight of synthetic macromolecules that can be cleared from the body ranges from 25 to 45 kD 27 . Cascade dendrimers as disclosed herein can be considered as an alternative for self-assembling dendrimeric systems 28 that also possess these desirable properties of degradability.
  • the multiple release dendrimeric conjugates and prodrugs of this invention containing covalently bound anticancer drug molecules as end groups and activated by a specific enzyme that is localized in the tumor environment or by any other specific chemical or biological event would combine a number of desirable properties for a tumor- selective anticancer compound.
  • W and X are each a single release l,(4+2n) electronic cascade spacer, being the same or different;
  • A is a cyclization elimination spacer
  • C, D, E, and F are each a self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system that upon activation can maximally release c, d, e, and f leaving groups, respectively; each Z is independently a leaving group or H or OH or a reactive moiety; a is O or l; c, d, e, and f are independently an integer from 2 (included) to 24 (included); w and x are independently an integer from 0 (included) to 5 (included); n is an integer of 0 (included) to 10 (included).
  • the invention relates to compounds of the formulas
  • V, W, X, C, D, E, F, A, w, x, c, d, e, f, and a are as defined above and each S independently has no meaning or is H, OH, or a reactive moiety that allows for coupling the multiple release spacer system to leaving groups Z, which may be the same or different, to afford compounds V-(W-) w (X-) x C((A-) a Z) c ,
  • a compound or prodrug (or (bio)conjugate) according to this invention comprises a specifier V, which is meant to consist of a group that can be site specifically removed or transformed and that is covalently attached to at least two therapeutic or diagnostic moieties Z or to at least two reactive moieties S via the novel self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system
  • the self-elimination multiple release spacers or spacer systems C, D, E, and F are independently selected from compounds having the formula
  • B is selected from NR 1 , O, and S;
  • P is C(R 2 )(R 3 )Q-(W-) w (X-) x ;
  • Q has no meaning or is -O-CO-;
  • W and X are each a single release l,(4+2n) electronic cascade spacer, being the same or different;
  • G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, and O are independently selected from compounds having the formula:
  • R x , R x and R x are independently selected from a C ⁇ - 6 alkyl group, a C . 2 o heterocyclyl group or a C 5 . 2 o aryl group, two or more of the substituents R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , and R 5 optionally being connected to one another to form one or more aliphatic or aromatic cyclic stractures, or
  • G, J, and M may also be selected from the group of P and hydrogen with the proviso that if two of G, J, and M are hydrogen, the remaining group must be
  • the l,(4+2n) electronic cascade spacers W and X are independently selected from compounds having the formula
  • Q has no meaning or is -O-CO-; t, u, and y are independently an integer of 0 to 5;
  • T, U, and Y are independently selected from compounds having the formula:
  • compound 26 depicted in figure 13 will serve as an example.
  • This compound is a compound of the formula
  • V-(W-) w (X-) x C(D((A-) a Z) d ) c It contains two generations of double release spacers, to which 4 end groups Z have been coupled.
  • the specifier V is [O], which means that V- B is an oxidized form of B (part of C). Reduction of this functionality induces self- elimination. Such moiety V-B can be chemically reduced, but it can also be reduced under physiological conditions under hypoxic conditions, or by a nitroreductase.
  • multiple release spacers disclosed in this invention possess multiple release characteristics because they are branched on two levels; i) branching on the aromatic ring where both ortho and para-substituents with respect to the location of the specifier can be introduced, and ii) branching by incorporation of additional conjugated double bonds at para and/or ortho positions of the aromatic rings, where the terminal C-atom of the double bond provides a branching point where two leaving groups can be attached.
  • a single release also called unbranched, self-eliminating spacer or spacer system in between the specifier and the first multiple release spacer. This may facilitate the activation step.
  • This single release self-eliminating spacer or spacer system is described by -(W-) W (X-) X .
  • connection of single release phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers to a generation of multiple release spacers or, preferably, to the highest generation of multiple release spacers before leaving groups Z enables the release of two or more leaving groups Z that are coupled with their aliphatic amino group to the multiple release spacer system.
  • aniline-based single release or multiple release spacers are preferred over phenol- or thiophenol-based single release or multiple release spacers.
  • the above shows, however that it might sometimes be beneficial to include phenol- or thiophenol- based single release spacer in the multiple release spacer system. For the same reason, it is sometimes beneficial to include phenol- or thiophenol-based multiple release spacers.
  • Q is preferably O-CO, but it may also have no meaning.
  • a compound with an aryl ether linkage between self-elimination spacer and leaving group, where the oxycarbonyl function is lacking has been reported to undergo self-elimination as well 11 .
  • Elongated self-elimination spacers can be incorporated between a cleavable moiety and leaving group, for example between specifier and drag as disclosed in WO 02/083180 (see also ref. 29).
  • Increasing the length of self-elimination spacers may have (an) additional advantage(s).
  • Self-elimination spacers with increased length may increase the rate and/or efficiency of activation of conjugate or prodrug. As a result, drag release characteristics may be enhanced through long spacers.
  • the self-ehmination spacers or spacer systems of the present invention can also be longer than conventional self- elimination spacers, such as for example the 1,6-elimination spacer, because they are elongated themselves or because multiple self-elimination linkers are combined within one multiple release spacer system.
  • the spacers or spacer systems of the present invention can be branched, but in addition they can be elongated. Both factors (length and degree of branching) of a spacer or spacer system must be carefully considered when designing conjugates or prodrugs.
  • a high degree of branching may be disadvantageous for the efficiency of activation of the conjugate or prodrag, especially when the branching points are in close proximity to the site of activation.
  • connection of single release spacer(s) to generations of multiple release spacers may enable an increase of the total number of end groups that can be incorporated because the surface of the outer sphere is increased by incorporation of additional single release spacer(s), and as a result more end groups (for example drugs) can be accommodated.
  • end groups for example drugs
  • a considered choice of a specific multiple release spacer or spacer system optionally including one or more single release self-elimination spacers must be made.
  • novel self-eliminating multiple release spacers disclosed in this invention may be coupled to one another to yield multiple release spacer systems in which the spacers are coupled through aryl-carbamate functions, by employing hydroxybenzotriazole as a catalyst to couple an aromatic amine to a p-nitrophenyl carbonate.
  • the invention is in another aspect related to compounds of the above-mentioned formulas wherein A is a cyclization spacer, further called ⁇ -amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacer having a formula selected from
  • R 1 and R 2 independently represent H, C ⁇ - 6 alkyl, said alkyl being optionally substituted with one or more of the following groups: hydroxy (OH), ether (OR x ), amino (NH 2 ), mono-substituted amino (NR X H), di-substituted amino (NR x 'R x 2 ), nitro (NO 2 ), halogen, CF 3 , CN, CONH 2 , SO 2 Me, CONHMe, cyclic C ⁇ - 5 alkylamino, imidazolyl, C ⁇ - 6 alkylpiperazinyl, morpholino, thiol (SH), thioether (SR X ), tetrazole, carboxy (COOH), carboxylate (COOR x ),
  • the ⁇ -amino group of the ⁇ -amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacer A does not need to be in close proximity to a particular electron-withdrawing substituent nor does it need to be an aromatic nitrogen, when it is connected to a multiple release spacer system that contains phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers in one generation, preferably in the highest generation (which is the one connected to A, Z, or S).
  • the ⁇ -amino group of the ⁇ -amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacer should possess sufficient leaving group ability.
  • the ⁇ -amino group of the ⁇ - amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacer is an N-aryl or an aliphatic N wherein the N is positioned in proximity of an electron-withdrawing group, such that the electron- withdrawing group can properly exert its electron-withdrawing property so that the leaving group ability of the ⁇ -amino group is increased.
  • the nucleophilicity of the leaving amino group should however be sufficient to allow for a sufficiently fast cyclization reaction.
  • the invention relates to a compound, wherein group A is an ⁇ - amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacer, and Z is a moiety coupled via its hydroxyl group to A.
  • Preferred compounds according to the invention are those wherein (W-) W (X-) X C C ,
  • R 1 OorOC(0)0 and from the compounds depicted above wherein single release 1,6-elimination p- aminobenzyloxycarbonyl spacer(s) are replaced by single release 1,8-eliminationp- aminocinnamyloxycarbonyl spacer(s).
  • the compounds depicted in the previous paragraph further comprise ⁇ -amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacers A.
  • the invention also relates to the self-eliminating multiple release spacers or spacer systems per se as described in this invention.
  • the invention thus relates to compounds as defined above without specifier V and with Z or S is H or OH, exemplified by for instance aminotriol 16 (fig 11) and aminodiol 23 (fig 13), extending to spacer systems comprising more than one spacer.
  • the invention relates to derivatives of the self-eliminating multiple release spacers or spacer systems per se that can be used for facilitating coupling with specifiers, leaving groups, reactive moieties or spacers.
  • an amino group may be derivatized as its isocyanate and an alcohol group may be derivatized as its p- nitrophenyl carbonate.
  • Other derivatizations are well within the knowledge of the skilled person.
  • One end of the spacer or spacer system must be able to react with the specifier, for example the tripeptide that is a substrate for plasmin.
  • this end of the spacer or spacer system is an amino group or a hydroxyl group, but it can also be another functionality.
  • the functionalities at the other end of the linker or linker system must be able to react with the leaving group Z (the drag).
  • these ends of the multiple release spacer or spacer system are hydroxyl groups, but they can also be other functionalities.
  • these functionalities react with the hydroxyl group of the drag to form for example carbonate linkages between linker and drag.
  • these functionalities react with the aromatic amino group of the drag to form for example N-aryl carbamate linkages between linker and drug.
  • these functionalities react with the sulfhydryl group of the drug to form for example oxycarbonylthio linkages between linker and drag.
  • these functionalities react with the carboxylic acid group of the drag. If spacers A are included in the spacer system, typically the hydroxyl group of the drag is reacted with A to form carbamate linkages between A and Z.
  • the specifier V typically contains a substrate molecule that is specifically cleaved by an enzyme present in the vicinity of or inside the target cells, for example tumor cells. More preferably, the specifier V contains a substrate that is specifically cleaved by an enzyme present at elevated levels in the vicinity of or inside the target cells as compared to other parts of the body, and most preferably the enzyme is present only in the vicinity of or inside the target cells. In an embodiment suitably the specifier V constitutes a targeting moiety in order to target the compounds to specific cells.
  • the specifier V may also contain a reactive moiety that can react with a targeting moiety that can target the resulting compounds to the target site by selective binding to a receptor or other receptive moiety associated with a given target cell population or by causing accumulation of the compounds of the invention in the vicinity of or inside the target cells by another mechanism.
  • these compounds contain two or more reactive moieties S, the compounds are from hereon called "bifunctional linkers".
  • the compounds are from hereon called "monofunctional spacer-leaving group conjugates”.
  • Both bifunctional linkers and monofunctional spacer-leaving group conjugates can be used to prepare prodrugs of the present invention that contain a specifier with a targeting group as well as a substrate specifically cleavable at the target site, a multiple release spacer system and two or more leaving groups Z.
  • a specifier with a targeting group as well as a substrate specifically cleavable at the target site, a multiple release spacer system and two or more leaving groups Z.
  • spacers and spacer systems are described that are able to release multiple leaving groups
  • monofunctional spacer-leaving group conjugates and bifunctional linkers can also be designed that contain single release spacers and spacer systems, such as for example described in WO 02/83180 and EP 1243276, which are incorporated by reference.
  • the reactive moiety in V is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a targeting moiety, e.g., a thiol group, an amino group, or an aldehyde group, to form a new specifier V that contains a targeting moiety.
  • a targeting moiety e.g., a thiol group, an amino group, or an aldehyde group
  • the reactive moiety in V is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a protein or protein fragment, e.g., a thiol group, an amino group, or an aldehyde group, to form a new specifier V that contains a protein or a protein fragment as the targeting moiety.
  • the reactive moiety in V is reacted with a nucleophilic group on an antibody or antibody fragment, e.g., a thiol group, an amino group, or an aldehyde group, to form a new specifier V that contains an antibody or antibody fragment as the targeting moiety.
  • a nucleophilic group on an antibody or antibody fragment e.g., a thiol group, an amino group, or an aldehyde group
  • the reactive moiety in V is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a peptide vector or receptor-binding moiety, e.g., a thiol group, an amino group, or an aldehyde group, to form a new specifier V that contains a peptide vector or receptor-binding moiety as the targeting moiety.
  • a nucleophilic group on a peptide vector or receptor-binding moiety e.g., a thiol group, an amino group, or an aldehyde group
  • the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation,
  • reactive moieties can be used to couple a targeting moiety having a nucleophilic group, e.g., a thiol group, to the specifier V having such a reactive moiety to form a new specifier V that contains a targeting moiety.
  • the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation,
  • a nucleophilic group on a protein or protein fragment e.g., a thiol group
  • a nucleophilic group on a protein or protein fragment e.g., a thiol group
  • the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on an antibody or antibody fragment, e.g., a thiol group, to form a new specifier V that contains an antibody or antibody fragment as the targeting moiety.
  • a nucleophilic group on an antibody or antibody fragment e.g., a thiol group
  • the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation,
  • a nucleophilic group on a peptide vector or receptor-binding moiety e.g., a thiol group
  • a nucleophilic group on a peptide vector or receptor-binding moiety e.g., a thiol group
  • the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an activated ester such as a N-hydroxysuccinimide ester, a/7-nitrophenyl ester, a pentafluorophenyl ester, and further an isothiocyanate, isocyanate, anhydride, acid chloride, sulfonyl chloride, or aldehyde.
  • an activated ester such as a N-hydroxysuccinimide ester, a/7-nitrophenyl ester, a pentafluorophenyl ester, and further an isothiocyanate, isocyanate, anhydride, acid chloride, sulfonyl chloride, or aldehyde.
  • These reactive moieties can be used to couple a targeting moiety having a nucleophilic group, e.g., an amino group, to the specifier V having such a reactive moiety to form a new specifier V that contains a targeting moiety.
  • the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an activated ester such as a N-hydroxysuccinimide ester, a ?-nitrophenyl ester, a pentafluorophenyl ester, and further an isothiocyanate, isocyanate, anhydride, acid chloride, sulfonyl chloride, or aldehyde, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a protein or protein fragment, e.g., an amino group, to form a new specifier V that contains a protein or a protein fragment as the targeting moiety.
  • an activated ester such as a N-hydroxysuccinimide ester, a ?-nitrophenyl ester, a pentafluorophenyl ester, and further an isothiocyanate, isocyanate, anhydride, acid chloride, sulfonyl chloride, or aldehyde, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on
  • the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an activated ester such as a N-hydroxysuccinimide ester, ap- nitrophenyl ester, a pentafluorophenyl ester, and further an isothiocyanate, isocyanate, anhydride, acid chloride, sulfonyl chloride, or aldehyde, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on an antibody or antibody fragment, e.g., an amino group, to form a new specifier V that contains an antibody or antibody fragment as the targeting moiety.
  • an activated ester such as a N-hydroxysuccinimide ester, ap- nitrophenyl ester, a pentafluorophenyl ester, and further an isothiocyanate, isocyanate, anhydride, acid chloride, sulfonyl chloride, or aldehyde, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on an antibody or antibody
  • the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an activated ester such as a N-hydroxysuccimmide ester, ap- nitrophenyl ester, a pentafluorophenyl ester, and further an isothiocyanate, isocyanate, anhydride, acid chloride, sulfonyl chloride, or aldehyde, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a peptide vector or receptor-binding moiety, e.g., an amino group, to form a new specifier V that contains a peptide vector or a receptor-binding moiety as the targeting moiety.
  • an activated ester such as a N-hydroxysuccimmide ester, ap- nitrophenyl ester, a pentafluorophenyl ester, and further an isothiocyanate, isocyanate, anhydride, acid chloride, sulfonyl chloride, or aldehyde,
  • the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an amino group or a hydrazine group.
  • These reactive moieties can be used to couple a targeting moiety having a nucleophilic group, e.g., an aldehyde group, to the specifier V having such a reactive moiety to form a new specifier V that contains a targeting moiety.
  • the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an amino group or a hydrazine group, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a protein or protein fragment, e.g., an aldehyde group, to form a new specifier V that contains a protein or a protein fragment as the targeting moiety.
  • the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an amino group or a hydrazine group, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on an antibody or antibody fragment, e.g., an aldehyde group, to form a new specifier V that contains an antibody or antibody fragment as the targeting moiety.
  • the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an amino group or a hydrazine group, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a peptide vector or receptor-binding moiety, e.g., an aldehyde group, to form a new specifier V that contains a peptide vector or a receptor-binding moiety as the targeting moiety.
  • a nucleophilic group on a peptide vector or receptor-binding moiety e.g., an aldehyde group
  • the specifier V may also contain a moiety that targets the compounds of the invention to the target site by selective binding to a receptor or other receptive moiety associated with a given target cell population or by causing accumulation of the compounds of the invention in the vicinity of or inside the target cells by another mechanism.
  • This targeting moiety may, for example, be bombesin, transferrin, gastrin, gastrin-releasing peptide, a molecule that specifically binds v ⁇ 3 and/or ⁇ v ⁇ 5 -integrin receptors, such as RGD-containing peptides, platelet-derived growth factor, IL-2, IL-6, a tumor growth factor, vaccinia growth factor, insulin and insulin-like growth factors I en II, an antigen-recognizing immunoglobulin or an antigen-recognizing fragment thereof, or a carbohydrate.
  • that antigen recognized by the immunoglobulin (or fragment thereof) is specific for the target cells, e.g. a tumor-specific antigen.
  • the specifier V contains a di-, tri-, or oligopeptide which consists of an amino acid sequence specifically recognized and thus cleavable by a protease, for example plasmin, a cathepsin, cathepsin B, prostate-specific antigen (PSA), urokinase- type plasminogen activator (u-PA), or a member of the family of matrix metalloproteinases, present in the vicinity of or inside the target cells, for example tumor cells.
  • a protease for example plasmin, a cathepsin, cathepsin B, prostate-specific antigen (PSA), urokinase- type plasminogen activator (u-PA), or a member of the family of matrix metalloproteinases, present in the vicinity of or inside the target cells, for example tumor cells.
  • the specifier V contains a substrate for the serine protease plasmin.
  • V contains a substrate for one or more of the cathepsins, typically cathepsin B.
  • V contains a ⁇ -glucuronide that is specifically recognized by ⁇ -glucuronidase present in the vicinity of or inside tumor cells.
  • the specifier is [O], yielding for example a nitro group that can be reduced under hypoxic conditions or by nitroreductases.
  • V is a nitro-(hetero)aromatic moiety, for example nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl. After reduction of the nitro group or removal of the nitro-aromatic specifier, elimination of the spacers or spacer systems described in this invention leads to drag release.
  • any specifier that is specifically cleaved following recognition by a disease-specific and or organ-specific and/or specifically targeted enzyme and/or receptor can be inco ⁇ orated into conjugates and prodrugs that contain the spacers or spacer systems claimed in this invention.
  • the invention relates to a compound wherein the specifier V contains a tripeptide.
  • the tripeptide is linked via its C-terminus to the self- eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system. More preferably the C-terminal amino acid residue of the tripeptide is selected from arginine and lysine, the middle amino acid residue of the tripeptide is selected from alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, methionine, phenylalanine, cyclohexylglycine, tryptophan and proline, and the N- terminal amino acid residue of the tripeptide is selected from a D-amino acid residue and a protected L-amino acid residue including protected glycine.
  • the specifier V is selected from D-alanylphenylalanyllysine, D-valylleucyllysine, D-alanylleucyllysine, D-valylphenylalanyllysine, D- valyltryptophanyllysme and D-alanyltryptophanyllysine.
  • specifier V may contain protective groups. Such compounds comprising protected specifier V may not, when contacted with for instance specifier specific enzymes, release the leaving groups. However, when deprotected and suitably activated such compounds will release leaving groups and thus such compounds comprising protected specifier V also fall under the scope of this invention.
  • the above can be envisaged in relation to the bifunctional or monofunctional compounds V-(W-) w (X-) x C((A-) a S) c , V-(W-) w (X-) x C(D((A-) a S) d ) c ,
  • Suitable protective groups for chemical functional groups, in particular for amino acids, are well known to the organic chemist and may for example be found in T.W. Greene, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1981.
  • the invention relates to a compound wherein the specifier V is an amino-terminal capped peptide covalently linked via the C-terminus to the self- eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system.
  • the specifier V is selected from benzyloxycarbonylphenylalanyllysine, benzyloxycarbonylvalyllysine, D- phenylalanylphenylalanyllysine, benzyloxycarbonylvalylcitralline, tert- butyloxycarbonylphenylalanyllysine, benzyloxycarbonylalanylarginylarginine, benzyloxycarbonylphenylalanyl-N-tosylarginine, 2- aminoethylthiosuccinimidopropionylvalinylcitralline, 2- aminoethylthiosuccinimidopropionyllysylphenylalanyllysine, acety
  • the moiety Z is preferably a therapeutic or diagnostic moiety, but it can also be a hydrogen or OH group or a reactive moiety.
  • a H or OH group or a reactive moiety may be accidentally introduced in a final conjugate during its synthesis, in case final coupling of leaving groups to the multiple release spacer or spacer system does not proceed completely. H or OH groups will not act as leaving group, but are not expected to inhibit elimination of leaving groups Z.
  • the Z can for instance be an anticancer drag, an antibiotic, an anti-inflammatory agent, or an anti-viral agent.
  • the moiety Z is an anticancer drag.
  • the anticancer drag is the hydroxyl containing etoposide, camptothecin, irinotecan (CPT- 11), SN-38, topotecan, 9-aminocamptothecin, 9-nitrocamptothecin, 10- hydroxycamptothecin, GG211, lurtotecan, combrestatin, paclitaxel, docetaxel, esperamycin, l,8-dihydroxy-bicyclo[7.3.1]trideca-4-ene-2,6-diyne-13-one, anguidine, doxorubicin, morpholine-doxorabicin, N-(5,5-diacetoxypentyl) doxorubicin, daunorabicin, epirabicin, idarabicin,
  • the anticancer drag can also be the sulfhydryl containing esperamicin, 6- mercaptopurine, or derivatives thereof.
  • the anticancer drag can also be the carboxyl containing methofrexate, aminopterin, camptothecin (ring-opened form of the lactone), chlorambucil, melphalan, butyric acid and retinoic acid, and derivatives thereof.
  • the anticancer drag can also be the aziridine amino containing or aromatic amino containing mitomycin C, mitomycin A, an anthracycline derivative containing an amine functionality with sufficient leaving group ability, mitoxantrone, 9- aminocamptothecin, methofrexate, aminopterin, tallysomycin, bleomycin, actinomycin, N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)-p- ⁇ henylenediamine, N,N-bis(2-fluoroethyl)-p- phenylenediamine, deoxycytidine, cytosine arabinoside, gemcitabine, and derivatives thereof.
  • the anticancer drag can also be the aliphatic amino-containing daunorabicin, doxorubicin, epirabicin, idarabicin, N-(5,5-diacetoxypentyl)doxorabicin, an anthracycline, N 8 -acetyl spermidine, l-(2-chloroethyl)-l,2-dimethanesulfonyl hydrazine, or derivatives thereof.
  • Z is selected from paclitaxel, docetaxel, or a derivative thereof, which is coupled to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via its 2'-hydroxyl group.
  • Z is selected from camptothecin, irinotecan (CPT-11), SN-38, topotecan, 9-aminocamptothecin, 9-nitrocamptothecin, 10-hydroxycamptothecin, GG211, lurtotecan, or a derivative thereof, which is coupled to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via its 20-hydroxyl group.
  • Z is selected from SN-38, topotecan, 10- hydroxycamptothecin, etoposide, 4-bis(2-chloroethyl)aminophenol, 4-bis(2- fluoroethyl)aminophenol, combrestatin, or a derivative thereof, which is coupled to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via its phenolic hydroxyl group.
  • Z is selected from 9-aminocamptothecin, N,N-bis(2- chloroethyl)-p-phenylenediamine, N,N-bis(2-fluoroethyl)-p-phenylenediamine, or a derivative thereof, which is coupled to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via its aromatic primary amine group,
  • Z is selected from doxorubicin, daunorabicin, epirabicin, idarabicin, or a derivative thereof, which is coupled to the self-elimination multiple release spacer (system) via its aliphatic amino group, provided that at least one generation of the multiple release spacer system, preferably the highest generation, contains phenol- or thiophenol based spacers.
  • the moiety S is a reactive moiety that enables coupling of moieties Z to the multiple release spacer (system).
  • suitable S moieties include, without limitation, N-succinimidyl-N-oxide, /7-nitrophenoxide, pentafluorophenoxide, carboxylates, halides, and sulfonates.
  • suitable S moieties include, without limitation, halides and sulfonates.
  • the moiety S may also be H or OH, in which case coupling to Z occurs by in situ conversion of S to a reactive moiety which is then substituted by Z in the same reaction mixture.
  • the compounds of the invention that contain two or more moieties S can be used to prepare the compounds of the invention that contain two or more moieties Z.
  • the compounds of the invention that contain two or more moieties S contain a specifier V that also contains a reactive moiety, the compounds have been named bifunctional linkers.
  • the compounds of the invention that contain two or more moieties S contain a specifier V that does not contain a reactive moiety, the compounds are from hereon called "monofunctional specifier-spacer conjugates".
  • Preferred compounds according to the invention are those selected from the group consisting of
  • incorporation of a multiple release spacer or spacer system into a compound or conjugate that is enzymatically cleaved by said enzyme increases the sensitivity of such an assay as one enzymatic cleavage can liberate numerous detectable molecules.
  • Detection or determination of an enzyme, for example a protease, in a sample can be performed by incubating the sample with a compound containing a multiple release spacer or spacer system according to this invention, which is a substrate for the (proteolytic) enzyme, and observing (proteolytic) cleavage of said substrate.
  • determining an enzyme means both qualitative analysis, i.e. detecting the presence of the enzyme, determining whether it is present, and quantitative analysis, i.e. quantifying the enzyme, determining the enzyme activity present in the sample.
  • chromogenic or fluorogenic peptide substrates have been devised which are often commercially available. In many cases, for example in case of serine proteases, the enzymes do not recognize the sequence which is C-terminal to the hydrolyzed bond. This part can be replaced by a chromogenic or fluorogenic leaving group like p-nitroaniline or ⁇ -naphtylamine. Such chromogenic or fluorogenic compounds can serve as leaving group Z in compounds of the present invention.
  • the multiple release spacer or spacer system may increase the sensitivity that can be obtained for detection and quantification of physiological concentrations of enzymes in biological fluids or tissue-extracts.
  • An enzyme can also be indirectly determined via its pro-enzyme containing a recognition site, e.g., an activation site, cleavable by said enzyme to be determined. Cleavage of the pro-enzyme can in such case be detected by observing the resulting activity using a suitable substrate of the activated pro-enzyme, the substrate containing a multiple release spacer or spacer system of the present invention.
  • a recognition site e.g., an activation site
  • the invention relates to a diagnostic assay process in which a compound according to the invention is used.
  • the invention relates to a process in which the presence or amount of an enzyme is determined by using a compound according to the invention.
  • the invention relates to a process in which the presence or amount of a protease is determined by using a compound according to the invention.
  • the invention relates to a process in which the compound according to the invention that is used comprises a substrate for said protease and leaving group Z is detected.
  • the invention relates to a process in which the compound according to the invention that is used comprises a substrate for an enzyme, which is the product of cleavage of its pro-enzyme precursor by said protease and leaving group Z is detected.
  • the specifier V may also comprise a polymer, such as for example poly[N-(2-hydroxy- propyl)methacrylamide] (poly-HPMA), poly-glutamic acid (poly-L-glutamic acid
  • PG poly(ethylene) glycol
  • PEG poly(ethylene) glycol
  • Structures of multiple release spacers are disclosed that can serve as suitable monomers to constract the multiple release dendrimeric prodrugs or (bio)conjugates.
  • a suitable monomer is able to release 2 or more leaving groups after activation.
  • One herein disclosed structure of such multiple release monomer is depicted in figure 7.
  • Triple release from this monomer, as depicted in figure 7, is based on the principles of unbranched 1,4- and 1,6-elimination spacers . After unmasking of the amine of 1
  • Figure 8 depicts the principle of drag release from a double release spacer. Self- elimination of this double release spacer is based on 1,8-elimination. Deprotection of the amino group in 7, affording 8, sets the stage for 2 1,8-elimination reactions releasing 2 leaving groups L-H.
  • An amine or hydroxylamine can be generated from a masked amine through reduction of a nitro function to the corresponding hydroxylamine or amine function. Both the hydroxylamine and the amine derivatives induce self-elimination of the spacer.
  • compounds were synthezised that contain multiple leaving groups coupled as end groups to one or two generations of multiple release spacers. These compounds were to release the leaving groups upon reduction of the nitro group attached to the aromatic ring at the center of the multiple release linker or linker system.
  • nitroaromatic compounds that contain antitumor drags, such as paclitaxel, as leaving groups can be considered for application in selective drag targeting to hypoxic areas in tumors, where the nitro group will be reduced.
  • these compounds can be used as conjugates and prodrugs that are activated by nitroreductases which are targeted to tumor cells through one of the directed enzyme prodrag therapy (DEPT) approaches. The synthesis of these compounds is disclosed.
  • nitrotriol 11 (figure 9) and aminotriol 16 (figure 11) can be synthesized following a number of routes.
  • Several approaches to obtain the corresponding amino-tri-methylester or amino-tri-carboxylic acid have been reported starting from for example nitromesitylene 31 .
  • the double release building block aminodiol 23 (figure 13) can be synthesized by reduction of the nitro group of 2-p-nitrobenzylidene propane- 1,3- diol 20.
  • model compound 19 (figure 11) aminotriol 16 was N-protected with an Aloe group to yield 17, subsequently triply activated with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate to yield 18, and coupled with propylamine.
  • nitrodiol 20 was doubly activated with excess p-nitrophenyl chloroformate in the presence of diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) and pyridine to yield doubly activated compound 21 (figure 12).
  • Doubly activated 21 was subsequently reacted with paclitaxel to yield the desired model compound 22.
  • a model compound was synthesized for delivering proof of principle for release of 4 leaving groups from a multiple release prodrag or (bio)co ⁇ jugate containing 2 generations of double release spacers.
  • two molecules of aminodiol 23 were coupled to doubly activated 21 using HOBt as a catalyst to yield tetraol 24 (figure 13).
  • Tetraol 24 was quadraply activated with excess -nitrophenyl chloroformate in the presence of diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) and pyridine to yield quadraply activated compound 25.
  • DIPEA diisopropylethylamine
  • Quadraply activated 25 was subsequently reacted with paclitaxel to yield the desired model compound 26.
  • Doubly activated 21 was also reacted with benzylamine to yield model compound 27 (figure 14).
  • doubly activated 21 was also reacted with the single release 1,6-elimination spacer to yield 28 (figure 15), which was subsequently activated using p-nitrophenyl chloroformate to yield 29.
  • Doubly activated 29 was reacted with p-methoxybenzylamine, p-chlorobenzylamine, or phenethyl alcohol, to yield model compounds 30, 31, and 32, respectively (figure 16).
  • p- nitrobenzyl chloroformate 33 was reacted with benzylamine to yield model compound 34 (figure 17).
  • conjugates, test compounds, and reference compounds are based on aniline-based spacers, it is obvious to one skilled in the art that similar compounds containing one or more phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers can be prepared analogously.
  • model compound 15 When the nitro function of model compound 15 was reduced (figure 20), thin layer chromatography indicated formation of a single product. However, formation of benzylamine was not or hardly observed. According to NMR, maximally 33 percent of benzylamine was released from 15.
  • model compounds 30 and 31, containing aliphatic amine leaving groups (p- methoxybenzylamine or p-chlorobenzylamine), were reduced. In both cases, within 30 min, the starting compound was converted into a single product, however, again no free amine was formed.
  • the reference compounds 35 and 36 were also treated with zinc and acetic acid (figure 28). According to ⁇ -NMR both compounds did not show any degradation, which demonstrates that the liberation of leaving groups from the nitro-containing model compounds is not due to unwanted side reactions.
  • the extent of electron-withdrawing capacity of the leaving groups determines whether more than one leaving group can be liberated from the herein disclosed spacers.
  • the multiple release spacer is a phenol- or thiophenol- based multiple release spacer or when the multiple release spacer is coupled to single release phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers, aliphatic amines are also suitable leaving groups and release of all aliphatic amine leaving groups does occur.
  • the total attainable number of end groups (e.g., drag moieties) per dendrimeric prodrag or conjugate may be restricted by steric conditions.
  • end groups e.g., drag moieties
  • the number of end groups that can be incorporated may be increased by addition of additional unbranched self-elimination spacer(s) (systems) to a generation of multiple release spacers or to the highest generation of multiple release spacer(s) before leaving groups Z in order to enlarge the outer sphere surface, thereby enabling attachment of more end groups.
  • the electronic cascade self-elimination process of 4-aminobenzyl alcohol 1,6- elimination spacers is known to proceed with a short half-live. This is an important factor in drag delivery applications of self-elimination spacers, as fast drag release after site-specific activation is required.
  • the spacer monomer may be tuned such that the spacer elimination process is retarded. This can be of use when the functional multiple release spacers or spacer systems of this invention are used for controlled release purposes.
  • Unbranched and branched monomeric aminobenzyloxycarbonyl and related electronic cascade spacers or spacer systems can be coupled to a next generation of monomeric spacers via carbamate bonds, which are presumably more stable under physiological conditions than ester or carbonate bonds 34 .
  • the dual or triple release monomer(s) employed in the multiple release prodrag or (bio)conjugate release the end groups (drags) through several consecutive 1,4-, 1,6-, or 1,8-eliminations.
  • Proof of principle of double or triple self-elimination was delivered upon chemical reduction of the nitrobenzyl or nitrocinnamyl derivatives containing benzyl alcohol, phenethyl alcohol, or paclitaxel as leaving groups (figures 19, 22, 23, 26). Complete release was observed by thin layer chromatography, and was unambiguously confirmed by NMR. Also the compound containing 2 generations of double release monomers and 4 paclitaxel moieties was shown to release all end groups following reduction of the nitro group (figure 23).
  • unbranched self-elimination spacers may be incorporated in between the specifier and the multiple release spacers. This may be beneficial for the enzymatic removal or transformation of the specifier.
  • a branched multiple release moiety directly coupled to the specifier may increase steric crowding around the specifier-spacer bond to be cleaved; additional single release self-elimination spacers may provide a solution here.
  • single release self-elimination spacers may be added to the highest generation of the multiple release spacer(s) before leaving groups Z. This may be beneficial for enhanced release of Z, depending on the chemical nature of the function with which Z, preferably a drag, is attached to the spacer. Incorporation of single release self-elimination spacers before Z (for example drug moieties) may be beneficial for the stability of the final product. If, for example, a self-elimination ⁇ -amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacer is incorporated in between the single release or multiple release electronic cascade spacer and a leaving group that is connected through its hydroxyl group, the stability of the final product may be increased when used under physiological conditions.
  • the invention relates to the use of any of the compounds defined above for the manufacture of a pharmaceutical preparation for the treatment of a mammal being in need thereof.
  • the invention also relates to methods of treating a mammal being in need thereof, whereby the method comprises the admimsfration of a pharmaceutical composition to the mammal in a therapeutically effective dose.
  • the invention relates to a process for preparing a pharmaceutical composition containing a compound as defined above, to provide a solid or a liquid formulation for administration orally, topically or by injection.
  • a process at least comprises the step of mixing the compound with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • the invention also relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising the compounds of the invention as defined above.
  • the compounds of the invention may be administered in purified form together with a pharmaceutical carrier as a pharmaceutical composition.
  • the preferred form depends on the intended mode of administration and therapeutic or diagnostic application.
  • the pharmaceutical carrier can be any compatible, nontoxic substance suitable to deliver the compounds of the invention to the patient.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are well known in the art and include, for example, aqueous solutions such as (sterile) water or physiologically buffered saline or other solvents or vehicles such as glycols, glycerol, oils such as olive oil or injectable organic esters, alcohol, fats, waxes, and inert solids may be used as the carrier.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier may further contain physiologically acceptable compounds that act, e.g. to stabilize or to increase the absorption of the compounds of the invention.
  • physiologically acceptable compounds include, for example, carbohydrates, such as glucose, sucrose or dextrans, antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid or glutathione, chelating agents, low molecular weight proteins or other stabilizers or excipients.
  • carbohydrates such as glucose, sucrose or dextrans
  • antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or glutathione
  • chelating agents such as ascorbic acid or glutathione
  • low molecular weight proteins or other stabilizers or excipients include, for example, carbohydrates, such as glucose, sucrose or dextrans, antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid or glutathione, chelating agents, low molecular weight proteins or other stabilizers or excipients.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable adjuvants, buffering agents, dispersing agents, and the like may also be incorporated into the pharmaceutical compositions.
  • the active ingredient can be administered in solid dosage forms, such as capsules, tablets, and powders, or in liquid dosage forms, such as elixirs, syraps, and suspensions.
  • Active component(s) can be encapsulated in gelatin capsules together with inactive ingredients and powdered carriers, such as glucose, lactose, sucrose, mannitol, starch, cellulose or cellulose derivatives, magnesium stearate, stearic acid, sodium saccharin, talcum, magnesium carbonate and the like.
  • inactive ingredients examples include red iron oxide, silica gel, sodium lauryl sulfate, titanium dioxide, edible white ink and the like.
  • Similar diluents can be used to make compressed tablets. Both tablets and capsules can be manufactured as sustained release products to provide for continuous release of medication over a period of hours. Compressed tablets can be sugar coated or film coated to mask any unpleasant taste and protect the tablet from the atmosphere, or enteric-coated for selective disintegration in the gastrointestinal tract.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration can contain coloring and flavoring to increase patient acceptance.
  • the compounds of the invention are however preferably administered parenterally. Preparations of the compounds of the invention for parenteral administration must be sterile. Sterilization is readily accomplished by filtration through sterile filtration membranes, optionally prior to or following lyophilization and reconstitution.
  • the parenteral route for administration of compounds of the invention is in accord with known methods, e.g. injection or infusion by intravenous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular, intraarterial, or intralesional routes.
  • the compounds of the mvention may be admimstered continuously by infusion or by bolus injection.
  • a typical composition for intravenous infusion could be made up to contain 100 to 500 ml of sterile 0.9% NaCl or 5% glucose optionally supplemented with a 20% albumin solution and 1 mg to 10 g of the compound of the invention, depending on the particular type of compound of the invention and its required dosing regime.
  • Methods for preparing parenterally administrable compositions are well known in the art and described in more detail in various sources, including, for example, Remington's Pharmaceutical Science 35 .
  • the invention also relates to compounds as defined above, wherein the specifier V is removed or transformed by an enzyme that is transported to the vicinity of or inside target cells or target tissue via antibody-directed enzyme prodrag therapy (ADEPT) 1 , polymer-directed enzyme prodrug therapy (PDEPT) or macromolecular-directed enzyme prodrag therapy (MDEPT) 2 , viras-directed enzyme prodrag therapy (NDEPT) 3 or gene-directed enzyme prodrag therapy (GDEPT) .
  • ADPT antibody-directed enzyme prodrag therapy
  • PDEPT polymer-directed enzyme prodrug therapy
  • MDEPT macromolecular-directed enzyme prodrag therapy
  • NDEPT viras-directed enzyme prodrag therapy
  • GDEPT gene-directed enzyme prodrag therapy
  • Example 1 Activation of nitrotriol 11 to give triply activated 12 (see fig. 9).
  • 100 mg (0.47 mmol) of nitrotriol 11 was dissolved in 6 mL of dry THF under an argon atmosphere.
  • the solution was added dropwise to a solution of 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate (1.42 g, 15 equiv) and pyridine (569 ⁇ L, 15 equiv) in 5 mL dry THF.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h, dichloromethane was added, and the organic layer was washed with 10% citric acid and brine.
  • the organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and evaporated to dryness.
  • Example 4 Coupling of benzylamine to triply activated 12 to give 15 (see fig. 10). To a solution of 12 (523 mg, 0.738 mmol) in dichloromethane were added benzylamine (403 ⁇ L, 3.69 mmol) and Et 3 N (514 ⁇ L, 3.69 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 h. Dichlorormethane was added and the resulting mixture was washed with 10% citric acid, saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure. Column chromatography (CH 2 Cl 2 /MeOH 25/1) gave 15 (406 mg, 90%) as a solid.
  • triol 17 to give triply activated tricarbonate 18 (see fig. 11).
  • a solution of 837 mg of triol 17 (3.13 mmol) in dry THF was added drop wise under an argon atmosphere to a solution of 9.47 g 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate (15 equiv) and 3.8 mL pyridine (15 equiv) in dry THF.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred for 5 hours and THF was evaporated.
  • CH 2 C1 2 was added and the organic layer was washed with 10% aqueous citric acid and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na 2 SO 4 and evaporated.
  • Example 8 Activation of nitrodiol 20 to give doubly activated 21 (see fig. 12).
  • Nitrodiol 20 (130 mg, 0.621 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of dry THF under an argon atmosphere and the solution was cooled to 0 °C.
  • Diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) (865 ⁇ L, 8 equiv), 4- nitrophenyl chloroformate (751 mg, 6 equiv), and pyridine (25 ⁇ L, 0.5 equiv) were added to the solution.
  • DIPEA Diisopropylethylamine
  • 4- nitrophenyl chloroformate (751 mg, 6 equiv)
  • pyridine 25 ⁇ L, 0.5 equiv
  • Doubly activated 21 (154 mg, 0.285 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of dry dimethylformamide (DMF) and aminodiol 23 (113 mg, 2.2 equiv), DIPEA (99 ⁇ L, 2 equiv), and a catalytic amount of hydroxybenzotriazole monohydrate (HOBt) (15 mg, 0.39 equiv) were added.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h.
  • HOBt (8 mg, 0.2 equiv) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for another 64 h.
  • 10% 2- propanol in EtOAc was added and the organic layer was washed with water and dried over sodium sulfate.
  • Example 11 Activation of tetraol 24 to give quadruply activated 25 (see fig. 13).
  • Tetraol 24 (58 mg, 0.094 mmol) was dissolved in dry THF and the solution was cooled to 0 °C.
  • DIPEA (261 ⁇ L, 16 equiv)
  • 4-mtrophenyl chloroformate (226 mg, 12 equiv)
  • pyridine 8 ⁇ L, 1 equiv
  • the reaction mixture was allowed to reach Rt and was stirred for 16 h. Dry dichloromethane was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for another 24 h. Dichloromethane was added and the organic layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, 10% citric acid, and brine.
  • Example 12 Coupling of paclitaxel to quadruply activated 25 to give 26 (see fig. 13).
  • Quadraply activated 25 13 mg, 0.010 mmol
  • Paclitaxel 35 mg, 4 equiv
  • DMAP 5.5 mg, 4.4 equiv
  • Dichloromethane was added and the organic layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, 0.5 N potassium bisulfate, and brine, and dried over sodium sulfate.
  • Example 13 Coupling of benzylamine to doubly activated 21 to give 27 (see fig. 14).
  • benzylamine 51 ⁇ L, 0.464 mmol
  • Et 3 N 65 ⁇ L, 0.464 mmol
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h.
  • Dichloromethane was added and the resulting mixture was washed with 10% citric acid, saturated bicarbonate and brine, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Column chromatography (CH 2 Cl 2 /MeOH 40/1) gave 27 (38 mg, 79.9 ⁇ mol, 86%) as a solid.
  • Example 14 Coupling of p-aminobenzyl alcohol to doubly activated 21 to give 28 (see fig. 15).
  • Compound 21 330 mg, 0.612 mmol
  • DMF 5 mL
  • p- aminobenzyl alcohol 166 mg, 1.35 mmol
  • DIPEA 214 ⁇ L, 1.22 mmol
  • 1- hydroxybenzotriazole 24.8 mg, 0.184 mmol
  • Example 16 Coupling of p-methoxybenzylamine to doubly activated 29 to give 30 (see fig. 16).
  • 29 50 mg, 59.7 ⁇ mol
  • l-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone 4 mL
  • DIPEA 3.0 ⁇ L, 18 ⁇ mol
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 h.
  • a 10% solution of isopropanol in ethyl acetate (25 mL) was added and the resulting mixture was washed with water and brine, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Example 17 Coupling of p-chlorobenzylamine to doubly activated 29 to give 31 (see fig. 16). To a solution of 29 (72 mg, 86 ⁇ mol) in THF (4 mL) were added at 0 °C p- chlorobenzylamine (42 ⁇ L, 0.34 mmol) and DIPEA (4.5 ⁇ L, 26 ⁇ mol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was purified by colum chromatography (EtOAc/hexanes 1/1) to afford 31 (60 mg, 71.2 mmol, 83%) as a white solid after freeze-drying.
  • Example 18 Coupling of phenethyl alcohol to doubly activated 29 to give 32 (see fig. 16).
  • 29 (18 mg, 21 ⁇ mol) in THF (2 mL) were added at 0 °C phenethyl alcohol (10.3 ⁇ L, 85.9 ⁇ mol), DIPEA (1.9 ⁇ L, 11 ⁇ mol), and DMAP (10.5 mg, 85.9 ⁇ mol).
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 h.
  • the reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was purified by column chromatography (EtOAc/hexanes 1/1) to afford 32 (9.5 mg, 12 mmol, 55%) as a white solid after freeze-drying.
  • Example 19 Coupling of benzylamine to 4-nitrobenzyl chloroformate 33 to give 34 (see fig. 17).
  • a solution of chloroformate 33 (200 mg, 0.923 mmol) in THF was added dropwise to a mixture of benzylamine (101 ⁇ L, 0.923 mmol) and Et3N (129 ⁇ L, 1 equiv) in THF at 0 °C.
  • the reaction mixture was allowed to reach room temperature and was stirred for 16 h.
  • EtOAc was added and the organic layer was washed with 0.1 M NaOH, 10% citric acid, and brine, and dried over sodium sulfate to quantitatively yield desired product 34.
  • Example 20 Proof of principle for triple elimination. Formation of benzyl alcohol upon reduction of 13 (see fig. 19). Compound 13 was dissolved in 3 mL of MeOH/AcOH/THF (1.5/0.5/1). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt. After 30 min thin layer chromatography indicated disappearance of starting compound and formation of a substantial amount of benzyl alcohol. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo, dioxane was added, and the resulting solution was freeze-dried.
  • Example 21 Proof of principle for triple elimination. Formation of phenethyl alcohol upon reduction of 14 (see fig. 19). Compound 14 was dissolved in 3.75 mL of MeOH/AcOH/THF (2/0.75/1). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt. After 1 h thin layer chromatography indicated disappearance of starting compound and formation of a substantial amount of phenethyl alcohol. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo, dioxane was added, and the resulting solution was freeze-dried.
  • Example 23 Deprotection of the Aloe group from 19. Failure of elimination of propylamine (see fig. 21).
  • Compound 19 (36 mg, 69 ⁇ mol) was dissolved in 1 mL of CDC1 3 . Morpholine was added (20 equiv, 120 ⁇ L, 1.38 mmol), and argon was bubbled through the solution. Then, a catalytic amount of palladium tetrakistriphenylphosphine was added. Elimination of propylamine was studied by 1H-NMR. After 1 h, thin layer chromatography indicated disappearance of starting compound.
  • Example 24 Proof of principle for double elimination. Formation of paclitaxel upon reduction of 22 (see fig. 22). Nifrocinnamyl biscarbonate 22 was dissolved in 3.5 mL of MeOH/AcOH/THF (2/0.5/1). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt. After 30 min thin layer chromatography indicated complete disappearance of starting compound and formation of a substantial amount of paclitaxel. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo, dioxane was added and the resulting solution was freeze-dried.
  • Example 25 Proof of principle for quadruple elimination. Formation of paclitaxel upon reduction of 26 (see fig. 23). Compound 26 was dissolved in 3.25 mL MeOH/AcOH/THF (1.5/0.75/1). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred. After 30 min, thin layer chromatography indicated disappearance of starting compound and formation of a substantial amount of paclitaxel. After 16 h, the mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo, dioxane was added, and the resulting solution was freeze-dried.
  • Example 26 Reduction of the nitro group in 27. Failure of elimination of benzylamine (see fig. 24). To a solution of 27 (18 mg, 38 ⁇ mol) in a 4:1 mixture of MeOH and AcOH (7.5 mL) Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt. After 1 h, thin layer chromatography indicated disappearance of starting compound and showed complete conversion to a single product. No formation of benzylamine was observed. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo, dioxane was added and the mixture was freeze-dried.
  • Example 29 Reduction of the nitro group in 32. Formation of phenethyl alcohol (see fig. 26). To a solution of 32 (8.0 mg, 10 ⁇ mol) in a 1:1 mixture of THF and methanol (1.5 mL) were added Raney Nickel (50% slurry in water, 0.05 mL) and hydrazine monohydrate (0.5 ⁇ L, 10 ⁇ mol). After 20 minutes, hydrazine monohydrate (0.5 ⁇ L, 10 ⁇ mol) were added. Thin layer chromatography (EtOAc/heptanes 1/1) showed complete conversion to a single product after 1 h. The reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • Example 30 Proof of principle for single elimination. Formation of benzylamine upon reduction of 34 (see fig. 27). Compound 34 (40 mg) was dissolved in 3.75 mL of MeOH/AcOH/THF (2/0.75/1). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt. After 100 min, thin layer chromatography indicated disappearance of starting compound and formation of a substantial amount of benzylamine. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo.
  • Example 31 Stability of 35 Treatment of 35 with Zinc (see fig. 28). Dibenzyl carbonate 35 (13 mg) was dissolved in 2.5 mL MeOH/THF/AcOH (1.5/0.5/0.5). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt for 16 h. Thin layer chromatography indicated no formation of new compounds, and indicated stability of 35. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo.
  • Example 32 Stability of 36 Treatment of 36 with Zinc (see fig. 28). Paclitaxel-2' -carbonate 36 (3 mg) was dissolved in 2.5 mL MeOH/THF/AcOH (1.5/0.5/0.5). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt for 16 h. Thin layer chromatography indicated no formation of new compounds, and indicated stability of 36. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo.
  • Cytotoxicity of multiple release spacers 16 and 23 The anti-proliferative effect of the monomeric spacers was determined in vitro applying seven well-characterised human tumor cell lines and the microculture sulphorhodamine B (SRB) test. The anti- proliferative effects were determined and expressed as ID 50 values (ng/mL), which are the (pro)drug concentrations that gave 50% inhibition of cell growth when compared to control cell growth after 5 days of incubation.
  • Triple release monomer 16 cell lines (ID 50 values in ng/mL): MCF-7; breast cancer (>62.500). EVSA-T; breast cancer (>62.500). WIDR; colon cancer (>62.500). IGROV; ovarian cancer (>62.500). M19; melanoma (>62.500). A498; renal cancer (55867). H226; non-small cell lung cancer (>62.500).
  • Double release monomer 23 cell lines (ID 5 o values in ng/mL): MCF-7; breast cancer (>62.500). EVSA-T; breast cancer (>62.500). WTDR; colon cancer (>62.500). IGROV; ovarian cancer (>62.500). M19; melanoma (>62.500). A498; renal cancer (56.784). H226; non-small cell lung cancer (42.406).

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Nanotechnology (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Biotechnology (AREA)
  • Crystallography & Structural Chemistry (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Medicinal Preparation (AREA)
  • Epoxy Compounds (AREA)
  • Heterocyclic Carbon Compounds Containing A Hetero Ring Having Oxygen Or Sulfur (AREA)

Abstract

This invention concerns multiple release spacers and spacer systems, which release multiple leaving groups following a single activation. It concerns compounds comprising a specifier linked to two or more of the same or different leaving groups (L in the figure) via a self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system, which compounds upon a single activation step, in particular removal or transformation of the specifier, release at least two leaving groups-.

Description

PRODRUGS BUILT AS MULTIPLE SELF-ELIMINATION-RELEASE SPACERS
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
This invention is directed to compounds or prodrugs comprising a multiple release spacer or spacer system. A multiple release spacer is defined as a self-elimination spacer that releases multiple leaving groups upon a single activation event. One or more (generations) of these multiple release spacers can be used for example to obtain conjugates or prodrugs which are activated by a single activation step at the preferred site of action in order to selectively deliver multiple therapeutic or diagnostic parent moieties to target cells or to a target site. In this invention preferably target cells are tumor cells.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Lack of selectivity of chemotherapeutic agents is a major problem in cancer treatment. Because highly toxic compounds are used in cancer chemotherapy, it is typically associated with severe side effects. Drug concentrations that would completely eradicate the tumor cannot be reached because of dose-limiting side effects such as gastrointestinal tract and bone marrow toxicity. In addition, tumors can develop resistance against anticancer agents after prolonged treatment. In modern drug development, targeting of cytotoxic drugs to the tumor site can be considered one of the primary goals.
A promising approach to obtain selectivity for tumor cells or tumor tissue is to exploit the existence of tumor-associated enzymes. A relatively high level of tumor-specific enzyme can convert a pharmacologically inactive prodrug to the corresponding active parent drug in the vicinity of or inside the tumor. Via this concept a high concentration of toxic anticancer agent can be generated at the tumor site. All tumor cells may be killed if the dose is sufficiently high, which may decrease development of drug resistant tumor cells.
There are several enzymes that are present at elevated levels in certain tumor tissues. One example is the enzyme β-glucuronidase, which is liberated from certain necrotic . tumor areas. Furthermore, several proteolytic enzymes have been shown to be associated with tumor invasion and metastasis. Several proteases, like for example the cathepsins and proteases from the urokinase-type plasminogen activator (u-PA) system are all involved in tumor metastasis. The serine protease plasmin plays a key role in tumor invasion and metastasis. The proteolytically active form of plasmin is formed from its inactive pro-enzyme form plasminogen by u-PA. The rumor-associated presence of plasmin can be exploited for targeting of plasmin-cleavable conjugates or prodrugs.
An enzyme can also be transported to the vicinity of or inside target cells or target tissue via antibody-directed enzyme prodrug therapy (ADEPT)1, polymer-directed enzyme prodrug therapy (PDEPT) or macromolecular-directed enzyme prodrug therapy (MDEPT) , virus-directed enzyme prodrug therapy (VDEPT) or gene-directed enzyme prodrug therapy (GDEPT) 4.
The technology of this invention relates to novel spacers (linkers) or spacer systems (linker systems) that can be inserted between a specifier (unit that can be cleaved or transformed) and leaving groups (for example parent drugs or detectable molecules). Furthermore, the invention relates to prodrugs and (bio)conjugates comprising a specifier, said novel spacers or spacer systems and multiple leaving groups, and to bifunctional linker systems comprising a (protected) specifier containing a reactive moiety that enables coupling to a targeting moiety on one side of the linker (system) and reactive moieties that enable coupling to multiple leaving groups (for example parent drugs or detectable molecules) on the other side of the linker (system). A great number of anticancer conjugates and prodrugs that have been developed in the past contain a self-eliminating connector or linker, also called self-elimination spacer. This spacer is incorporated between the specifier and the drug in order to facilitate enzymatic cleavage and so enhance the kinetics of drug release (as shown in figure 1). The specifier (which for example can be an oligopeptide substrate for a protease or for example a β-glucuronide substrate for β-glucuronidase) must be site-specifically removed or transformed, followed by a spontaneous spacer elimination to release the cytotoxic parent drug. Up to now self-elimination spacers have been implemented that release one drug molecule upon prodrug activation and subsequent spacer elimination. When the prodrugs and (bio-)conjugates containing multiple drug moieties are considered that have been reported thus far, an independent cleavage was necessary for each drug molecule to be released.
WO 98/13059 is a relevant disclosure describing a prodrug comprising an amino- terminal capped peptide covalently linked to a therapeutic drug through a self- eliminating spacer. In particular this document describes the use of -aminobenzyl- oxycarbonyl (PABC) as self-eliminating spacer. The PABC electronic cascade spacer was already known from for instance Carl et al., J. Med. Chem., 1981, vol. 24, 479- 480. Specifically the anticancer drugs doxorubicin, mitomycin C, paclitaxel and camptothecin coupled to PABC are described. A second self-eliminating spacer that is described is p-amino-bis(hydroxymethyl)styrene (BHMS), having the structure p- ϊ- Ph-CH=C(CH2O-)2, including the carbonyl groups the structure isj->-NH-Ph - CH=C(CH2OCO-)2. It is noted that this spacer is described in this disclosure as a bis- carbamate, which teaches that two drag molecules are linked to this spacer via an amine functionality of the drag. The only drug moiety that is disclosed that is actually coupled to the BHMS spacer is doxorubicin. Doxorubicin is coupled via its sugar amino group resulting in a carbamate linkage between spacer and drug. Further it is stated that the spacer can bind two drug moieties. However, the document is silent on how many drag molecules are actually released.
Other systems that are loaded with multiple covalently bound bioactive molecules as end groups have been reported. Examples are systems that release doxorubicin after acidolysis of each hydrazone linker5, starlike HPMA copolymers containing doxorubicin6, or multi-loaded poly(ethylene glycol) prodrugs7. A doxorubicin- containing starlike HPMA copolymer with an antibody as the core has also been reported . A number of recent publications have described the use of branched linkers in combination with antibody-containing prodrugs or bioconjugates with the aim of increasing the number of drugs bound per antibody9. However, to our knowledge, in each multi-loaded prodrug system reported so far, each single end group needs to be independently cleaved in order to release all end groups.
Thus there is a need for improved prodrugs or (bio-)conjugates in terms of (efficiency of) release of sufficient amounts of active drag in relation to the activation that is required at a desired site of action. In many cases, in prodrugs or (bio)conjugates, it is desirable to increase drag loading per targeting unit, in order to improve the efficacy of targeted compounds.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention fulfills the above mentioned need with a compound comprising a specifier (V) linked to two or more of the same or different leaving groups (Z) via a self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system, which compound upon a single activation step releases at least two leaving groups, said activation step being the removal or transformation of the specifier. Self-elimination spacers can also be coupled to one another, so that more than one spacer is incorporated between specifier and leaving group. Hereinbelow, also the term (self-elimination) spacer system is used, which comprises two or more spacers, being either self-eliminating multiple release or single release spacers, connected together. The present invention also describes bifunctional linker systems comprising a
(protected) specifier containing a reactive moiety that enables coupling to a targeting moiety (which then together with the initial specifier becomes a mnctionalised specifier V) on one side of the spacer (system). Further, the bifunctional linker systems comprise reactive moieties that enable coupling to multiple leaving groups (for example parent drags or detectable molecules).
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
Figure 1 shows schematically the conversion of a spacer containing prodrug into the parent drag. Figure 2 shows schematically the liberation of multiple leaving group molecules from multiple release spacer contaniing compounds.
Figure 3 shows schematically the liberation of 4 leaving group molecules from a compound containing 2 generations of double release spacers.
Figure 4 shows schematically the liberation of 9 leaving group molecules from a compound containing 2 generations of triple release spacers.
Figure 5 shows the principle of 1,6-elimination.
Figure 6 shows the principle of 1,8-elimination. Figure 7 shows the proposed principle of elimination of 3 leaving groups from a triple release spacer.
Figure 8 shows the proposed principle of elimination of 2 leaving groups from a double release spacer. Figure 9 shows the preparation of 2 model compounds containing a triple release spacer and 3 benzyl alcohol or phenethyl alcohol leaving groups.
Figure 10 shows the preparation of a model compound containing a triple release spacer and 3 benzylamine leaving groups.
Figure 11 shows the preparation of a model compound containing a triple release spacer and 3 propylamine leaving groups.
Figure 12 shows the preparation of a prodrug containing a double release spacer and 2 paclitaxel moieties.
Figure 13 shows the preparation of a prodrug containing two generations of double release spacers and 4 paclitaxel moieties. Figure 14 shows the preparation of a model compound containing a double release spacer and 2 benzylamine leaving groups.
Figure 15 shows the preparation of a doubly p-nitrophenyl carbonate activated compound containing a double release spacer coupled to two single release spacers.
Figure 16 shows the preparation of 3 model compounds containing a double release spacer coupled to two single release spacers.
Figure 17 shows the preparation of a model compound containing a single release spacer coupled to benzylamine.
Figure 18 shows the reference compounds dibenzyl carbonate and 2'-O-cinnamyl oxycarbonylpaclitaxel. Figure 19 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the 2 model compounds containing
3 benzyl alcohol or 3 phenethyl alcohol leaving groups with the concomitant liberation of all leaving groups.
Figure 20 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the model compound containing 3 benzylamine leaving groups. Figure 21 shows the removal of the Aloe group from the model compound containing 3 propylamine leaving groups.
Figure 22 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the prodrug containing 2 paclitaxel moieties with the concomitant liberation of 2 molecules of paclitaxel. Figure 23 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the prodrag containing 4 paclitaxel moieties with the concomitant liberation of 4 molecules of paclitaxel. Figure 24 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the model compound containing 2 benzylamine leaving groups. Figure 25 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the 2 model compounds containing 2 p-methoxybenzylamine or 2 p-chlorobenzylamine leaving groups. Figure 26 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the model compound containing 2 phenethyl alcohol moieties with the concomitant liberation of 2 molecules of phenethyl alcohol. Figure 27 shows the reduction of the nitro group in the model compound containing a benzylamine leaving group, with the concomitant liberation of benzylamine. Figure 28 shows the treatment of two reference compounds with zinc and acetic acid, which does not lead to any degradation of starting material.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
In this invention a new technology is disclosed that can be used to induce release of more than one leaving group following a single activation step. It can be applied for example to prepare prodrugs or conjugates, which can for example be used for targeting drags to disease-related or organ-specific tissue or cells, for example tumor- specific conjugates or prodrugs that are improved with respect to conjugates or prodrugs known thus far in that they release more than one parent moiety after a single activation step. This aims at a therapeutic advantage. The present invention is deemed to be applicable to all drags that need to be delivered at a specific target site where a specific disease-related or specifically targeted biomolecule can convert the prodrag or conjugate into drags or induce conversion of the prodrag or conjugate into drags. This invention can furthermore find application in (non-specific) controlled release of compounds, with the aim of enhancing characteristics of parent moiety release.
In another aspect, this invention can find application in a diagnostic assay process. An enzyme can be detected by a compound of this invention containing a multiple release spacer or spacer system that is selectively activated by said enzyme to release multiple detectable molecules (leaving groups), thus increasing the sensitivity of the assay. In this invention, self-elimination multiple release spacers are disclosed that enable release of multiple leaving group molecules upon a single activation event. These self- elimination multiple release spacers are applicable in conjugates or prodrugs, for example anticancer prodrugs, and significantly enhance the amount of drag molecules liberated per (enzymatic) activation, resulting in a potential therapeutic advantage.
In the generic stractures throughout this description and in the claims letters are used to define structural elements. Some of these letters can be mistaken to represent an atom, such as C, N, O, P. B, F, S, V, W, I, Y. To avoid confusion whenever these letters do not represent an atom they are given in bold typeface.
In the stractures throughout this description and in the claims molecular stractures or parts thereof are drawn. As usual in such drawings bonds between atoms are represented by lines, in some cases, to indicate stereochemistry, by bold or broken or wedged lines. Usually a line ending in space (a "loose" end), i.e. at one end not having another line or specific atom connected to it represents a CH3 group. This is correct for the drawings representing the preferred compounds according to the invention hereinbelow. However for those stractures representing a structural element of the compounds according to the invention, in particular A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, O, T, U and Y, a line ending in space indicates the position of attachment of another structural element of the compound or conjugate. This includes attachment to V, S or Z. Also for the drawings representing the preferred structural elements ( -)W(X-)XCC , (W-)w(X-)xC(Dd)c, (W-)w(X-)xC(D(Ee)d)c and (W-)w(X-)xC(D(E(Ff)e)d)c a line ending in space indicates the position of attachment of another structural element of the compound or conjugate, including attachment to V, S or Z. An alternative drawing of a line representing a bond to another structural element would be a drawing of a line with a wavy line perpendicular at the "loose" end of the line.
Furthermore, the stractures or parts thereof have been drawn, under the assumption that the stractures are read from left to right, meaning that the specifier V is always located on the left side and the leaving groups Z or the reactive moieties S are always located on the right side of such stractures. According to the invention, two 'branched self-elimination spacers', herein also called 'multiple release spacers', have been developed that are able to release multiple moieties. Spacers that are able to release only a single moiety are called 'unbranched spacers' or 'single release spacers'. Spacers, either branched or unbranched, which self-eliminate through a l,(4+2n)- elimination (n = 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 or 10) (for example 1,6-elimination, 1,8- elimination, or 1,10-elimination) are further called 'electronic cascade' spacers.
When a spacer able to release 2 leaving groups, hereinbelow called "double release spacer", is used between specifier and leaving groups, two leaving group molecules are released per (enzymatic) activation (figure 2a). When a spacer able to release 3 leaving groups, hereinbelow called "triple release spacer", is used, three leaving group molecules will be released per activated compound or prodrag (figure 2b).
When a spacer is connected to one or more other spacers via a direct bond, this combination of spacers is referred to as 'spacer system'. When at least one of these spacers is a multiple release spacer, it is called a 'multiple release spacer system'.
An aniline-based spacer is a multiple release or single release spacer that comprises an aromatic amino group on the left-hand side.
A phenol- or thiophenol-based spacer is a multiple release or single release spacer that comprises an aromatic hydroxy or thio group, respectively on the lefthand side. Lefthand side refers to the position in the molecule as shown in e.g. figures 5, 6, 7 and 8.
Surprisingly it was found that it is required for more than one leaving group molecule to be released that the leaving groups are not aliphatic amine groups when only an aniline-based multiple release spacer is employed. In other words the leaving groups (Z) should not be coupled to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer via their aliphatic amine groups if the spacer is an aniline-based multiple release spacer. In the examples it is shown that if the leaving group Z is propylamine, p- methoxybenzylamine, benzylamine, or p-chlorobenzylamine, coupled via its primary amine group, maximally one of these leaving groups is actually released (see examples 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 / figures 20, 21, 24, and 25).
When the spacer is a phenol-based or thiophenol-based multiple release spacer or when the multiple release spacer is directly coupled to single release phenol- or thiophenol- based spacers or spacer systems, however, the leaving groups can also be coupled via their aliphatic amino group as all leaving groups are liberated upon activation.
Preferably the leaving groups Z are linked to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer via a group that possesses sufficient electron-withdrawing capacity, such as for example O, S, aromatic N, or aliphatic N. It is important to note that in the context of this invention with aromatic N is meant a nitrogen atom covalently bound to an aromatic group such as for instance a (substituted) phenyl ring or other (hetero)aromatic group, but also aromatic N can mean a nitrogen in an aromatic ring such as for instance in a pyrrole ring or in an imidazole ring. As disclosed in this invention, the leaving groups must possess better leaving group capabilities than aliphatic amines when the multiple release spacer is an aniline-based spacer. Propylamine, p-methoxybenzylamine, benzylamine, and even p-chlorobenzylamine did not possess sufficient electron- withdrawing capacity to induce complete release of all end groups when the spacer is an aniline-based spacer. In contrast, benzyl alcohol, phenethyl alcohol, paclitaxel, and certain para-substituted aniline derivatives all showed to be completely released from double and triple release spacers disclosed in this invention. For example in case of the herein disclosed double release spacers, when the para-substituted aniline derivative was NH-C6H -CH -O-CO-NH-CH2-R, multiple release did not take place. In contrast, when the para-substituted aniline derivative was NH-C6H4-CH=C(CH2-O-CO-2 '-O-ρaclitaxel)2, multiple release did take place.
When the multiple release spacer is a phenol- or thiophenol-based multiple release spacer or when the multiple release spacer is coupled to single release phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers, aliphatic amines are also suitable leaving groups and release of all aliphatic amine leaving groups does occur. This can be reasoned based on the above as aliphatic alcohols prove to be suitable leaving groups (e.g., from H2N-C6H4- CH=C(CH2-O-CO-2'-O-paclitaxel)2 two molecules of paclitaxel are released) and therefore release of phenol-based spacers, to which an aliphatic amine leaving group is connected, from a multiple release spacer (e.g., H N-C6H4-CH=C(CH -O-C(O)O-C6H4- CH2OC(O)NR1R2)2) should occur by virtue of their increased leaving capability with respect to aliphatic alcohols. As elimination of aliphatic amines from hydroxybenzyl- based spacer-aliphatic amine conjugates is known10, release of aliphatic amines from spacer systems in which the aliphatic amine is directly connected to a phenol-based spacer takes place as well.
The above shows that subtle changes can determine whether multiple release occurs or not. With all aliphatic amines, and even with certain para-substituted aniline derivatives tested, release of more than one leaving group did not take place when the spacer is an aniline-based spacer, but occurs when the spacer is a phenol- or thiophenol-based spacer, whereas with certain other para-substituted aniline derivatives, and with all hydroxyl leaving groups tested, complete elimination of all end groups did occur independent of the type of spacer used.
For at least two molecules to leave the compound according to the invention the leaving group should be coupled via its oxygen, such as for example its primary, secondary or tertiary alcohol, its phenol, or its phosphate, its sulphur, or its aromatic amine. In order for at least two leaving groups that are coupled via their aliphatic amino group to leave from a conjugate comprising one multiple release spacer, the spacer should be a phenol- or thiophenol-based multiple release spacer or the spacer system comprising one aniline-based multiple release spacer should also comprise single release phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers directly connected to this multiple release spacer. The linkage between self-eliminating multiple release spacer (system) and leaving group can be described as carbonate, alkyl phosphate, oxycarbonylthio, carbamate, or N-aryl-carbamate. In some cases, for example in case of an aromatic alcohol leaving group coupled to a single release self-elimination spacer via an aryl ether linkage11, the leaving group can also be linked to the spacer without an oxycarbonyl unit without compromising self-elimination.
In one embodiment the compound comprises one self-eliminating multiple release spacer. In a further embodiment the compound comprises two or more self-eliminating multiple release spacers. In yet a further embodiment the compound comprises three or more self-eliminating multiple release spacers. The self-elimination multiple release spacers can also be coupled to one another (figures 3 and 4). h this case compounds are obtained that contain multiple generations of multiple release spacers. If one multiple release spacer is incorporated in the spacer system of the compound according to the invention, the compound contains one generation of multiple release spacer. If two or more self-eliminating multiple release spacers are coupled to a first self-eliminating multiple release spacer, the resulting compound contains two generations of multiple release spacers (second generation). If two or more self-eliminating multiple release spacers are coupled to two or more multiple release spacers that constitute the second generation self-eliminating multiple release spacers, the resulting compound contains three generations of multiple release spacers (third generation). If a compound according to the invention contains two or more generations of self-eliminating multiple release spacers, the compound possesses a dendritic (or dendrimeric) stracture and can be called a dendrimer. In one embodiment of the invention the compound comprises one self-eliminating multiple release spacer. In a further embodiment of the invention the compound comprises two or more generations of self-eliminating multiple release spacers. In yet a further embodiment the compound comprises three or more generations of self-eliminating multiple release spacers. For instance by coupling two self-elimination double release spacers to a first self-elimination double release spacer and optionally again coupling of four self-elimination double release spacers to the second two self-elimination double release spacers, a dendritic stracture is constructed. The number of leaving group molecules, for example drag molecules, that can be bound per specifier is multiplied with every generation of self-elimination multiple release spacers incorporated. Each new generation of self-elimination multiple release spacers that is coupled to the preceding generation multiplies the number of leaving group molecules that can eventually be present in the compound or conjugate by a factor that is equal to the number of leaving groups that can be bound to the multiple release spacer of the generation that is newly incorporated. The final compound or prodrag (or bioconjugate) that is obtained is a dendrimer.
Thus in a further embodiment of the invention the compound comprises a self- eliminating multiple release spacer system in the form of a dendritic stracture. For at least two molecules to leave such a dendritic multiple release spacer system, the leaving groups should be coupled via their oxygen, such as for example their primary, secondary or tertiary alcohol, their phenol, or their phosphate, their sulphur, or their aromatic amine. In order for at least two leaving groups that are coupled via their aliphatic amino group to leave, at least one generation of the dendritic multiple release spacer system should comprise phenol- or thiophenol-based multiple release spacers or should be coupled to the next generation of multiple release spacers or to the leaving groups via single release phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers . Preferably the highest generation of multiple release spacers or spacer systems should be phenol- or thiophenol-based.
In a preferred embodiment, when an aniline-, phenol- or thiophenol-based multiple release spacer (system) is used, the leaving groups are not aliphatic amines, but preferably for example O, S or aromatic N.
Dendrimers, also known as starburst polymers, are well-defined highly branched treelike macromolecules with a large number of end groups12. One application of dendrimeric (or dendritic) stractures that has been explored is drug delivery . In the emerging field of dendrimeric drug delivery, biologically active substances can be covalently linked to dendrimeric end groups, or can be encapsulated inside dendrimers. In the examples of the first case that have been reported thus far, each drag molecule must be independently liberated via a chemical or biological cleavage step14. In the second case, specific physiological conditions need to change the folding and/or tertiary stracture of the dendrimer, thereby releasing encapsulated material. Release of active substances from dendrimers can be induced by pH15, incorporation of photosensitive units , or by enzymatic cleavage .
The novel self-elimination multiple release spacers disclosed herein enable complete release of multiple leaving groups, for example biologically active substances, that are covalently linked to the dendrimeric end groups in such a way that a single activation is sufficient to release all end groups (figures 3 and 4). A single chemical or biological activating event should lead to a cascade of self-elimination reactions thereby releasing multiple leaving groups. Dendrimers with these properties may be useful for several applications, and are considered particularly useful in the area of diagnostics and the area of drag delivery, for example in anticancer therapy, where tumor-selective degradation of the dendrimeric material is desired. Multiple drag molecules can be site-specifically released by employment of only one targeting or drug delivery device. Compounds that contain two or more generations of multiple release self-elimination spacers, optionally connected to each other via single release spacers or spacer systems are further called 'cascade dendrimers'.
Several applications are imaginable for the multiple release spacers or spacer systems or cascade dendrimers of this invention. Firstly, bioactive compounds can be site- specifically delivered. The concept can be applied to anticancer agents, but also antibiotics can be incorporated as end groups in a cascade dendrimer that is activated for example by bacterial enzymes, such as for example β-lactamase. In addition, cascade dendrimers may be applicable in the agrochemical field for release of pesticides . Through sophisticated synthesis, cascade dendrimers may be prepared that contain two or more different parent compounds. This may be interesting when it is considered that combination therapy emerges as a clinically important mode of treatment for diseases such as cancer, bacterial diseases, and HIN.
Furthermore, biodegradable dendrimers might be interesting for the production of biodegradable materials such as plastics, or may be used as devices that enable the controlled or slow release of drags by incorporation of, for example, an enzymatically degradable sequence. In addition, cascade dendrimers may be used for diagnostic purposes19. They could serve as an amplification mechanism in diagnostic assays, see hereinbelow.
Several strategies have evolved to improve the specificity of anticancer drags, the prodrag concept being one of them20'21. A prodrag is an inactive derivative of an active drag, which is site-specifically activated to release the active parent drag. Prodrugs that are activated by tumor-specific or tumor-targeted enzymes have shown promising results22. Alternatively, prodrugs of antitumor agents coupled to polymers, as already reported by Ringsdorf23, provide another targeting principle. Polymers, including dendrimers, can passively lead to tumor-specificity, due to the enhanced permeability and retention effect (EPR)24. This effect retains polymeric material with an approximate molecular weight > 40 kD inside tumor tissue due to discontinuous (leaky) and poorly formed tumor endothelium and poor lymphatic drainage. Frequently used polymeric carriers for drag delivery are poly[N-(2-hydroxypropyl)methacrylamide] (poly-HPMA)25, poly-glutamic acid, for example poly-L-glutamic acid (PG), and poly(ethylene) glycol (PEG) . Application of dendrimers in drug delivery can be preferred to other polymers because, by definition, dendrimers are not as polydisperse as conventional polymers. In general, they can be obtained as homogeneous compounds more easily than polymers, a fact that may facilitate approval of dendrimeric material for medicinal purposes.
An important advantage of cascade dendrimers over conventional dendrimers or polymers would be that they would be selectively degradable, thus clearable from the body. Clearance of polymers from the body is a limiting factor in current polymeric drag delivery systems, as the maximum molecular weight of synthetic macromolecules that can be cleared from the body ranges from 25 to 45 kD27. Cascade dendrimers as disclosed herein can be considered as an alternative for self-assembling dendrimeric systems28 that also possess these desirable properties of degradability.
Thus, the multiple release dendrimeric conjugates and prodrugs of this invention containing covalently bound anticancer drug molecules as end groups and activated by a specific enzyme that is localized in the tumor environment or by any other specific chemical or biological event would combine a number of desirable properties for a tumor- selective anticancer compound.
More specifically the invention relates to compounds of the formulas
V-(W-)w(X-)xC((A-)aZ)c,
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D((A-)aZ)d)c,
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E((A-)aZ)e)d)c, and V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E(F((A-)aZ)f)e)d)o, wherein: V is selected from [O] and a specifier which is removed or transformed by a chemical, photochemical, physical, biological, or enzymatic activation, optionally after prior binding to a receptor;
(W-)w(X-)xC((A-)a)c, (W-)w(X-)xC(D((A-)a)d)c,
(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E((A-)a)e)d)c, and
( -)w(X-)xC(D(E(F((A-)a)f)e)d)c are self-eliminating multiple release spacers or spacer systems;
W and X are each a single release l,(4+2n) electronic cascade spacer, being the same or different;
A is a cyclization elimination spacer;
C, D, E, and F are each a self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system that upon activation can maximally release c, d, e, and f leaving groups, respectively; each Z is independently a leaving group or H or OH or a reactive moiety; a is O or l; c, d, e, and f are independently an integer from 2 (included) to 24 (included); w and x are independently an integer from 0 (included) to 5 (included); n is an integer of 0 (included) to 10 (included).
In a further embodiment, the invention relates to compounds of the formulas
V-(W-)w(X-)xC((A-)aS)c,
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D((A-)aS)d)c,
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E((A-)aS)e)d)c, and
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E(F((A-)aS)f)e)d)c, wherein:
V, W, X, C, D, E, F, A, w, x, c, d, e, f, and a are as defined above and each S independently has no meaning or is H, OH, or a reactive moiety that allows for coupling the multiple release spacer system to leaving groups Z, which may be the same or different, to afford compounds V-(W-)w(X-)xC((A-)aZ)c,
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D((A-)aZ)d)c,
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E((A-)aZ)e)d)c, and
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E(F((A-)aZ)f)e)d)c, respectively. A compound or prodrug (or (bio)conjugate) according to this invention comprises a specifier V, which is meant to consist of a group that can be site specifically removed or transformed and that is covalently attached to at least two therapeutic or diagnostic moieties Z or to at least two reactive moieties S via the novel self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system
(W-)w(X)xC((A-)a)c or (W-)w(X-)xC(D((A-)a)d)c or (W-)w(X-)xC(D(E((A-)a)e)d)c or (W-)w(X-)xC(D(E(F((A-)a)f)e)d)c. These self-eliminating multiple release spacers or spacer systems possess multiple sites for attachment of moieties Z or moieties S.
According to a preferred embodiment of the invention, the self-elimination multiple release spacers or spacer systems C, D, E, and F are independently selected from compounds having the formula
Figure imgf000018_0001
wherein B is selected from NR1, O, and S; P is C(R2)(R3)Q-(W-)w(X-)x; Q has no meaning or is -O-CO-;
W and X are each a single release l,(4+2n) electronic cascade spacer, being the same or different;
G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, and O are independently selected from compounds having the formula:
Figure imgf000018_0002
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, and R5 independently represent H, Cι-6 alkyl, C3-2o heterocyclyl, C5-2o aryl, Cι-6 alkoxy, hydroxy (OH), amino (NH2), mono-substituted amino (NRXH), di-substituted amino (NR^Rx 2), nitro (NO2), halogen, CF3, CN, CONH2, SO2Me, CONHMe, cyclic Cι_5 alkylamino, imidazolyl, Cι-6 alkylpiperazinyl, morpholino, thiol (SH), thioether (SRX), tetrazole, carboxy (COOH), carboxylate (COORx), sulphoxy (S(=O)2OH), sulphonate (S(=O)2ORx), sulphonyl (S(=O)2Rx), sulphixy (S(=O)OH), sulphinate (S(=O)ORx), sulphinyl (S(=O)Rx), phosphonooxy (OP(=O)(OH)2), and
1 phosphate (OP(=O)(ORx)2), where Rx, Rx and Rx are independently selected from a Cι-6 alkyl group, a C .2o heterocyclyl group or a C5.2o aryl group, two or more of the substituents R1, R2, R3, R4, and R5 optionally being connected to one another to form one or more aliphatic or aromatic cyclic stractures, or
G, J, and M may also be selected from the group of P and hydrogen with the proviso that if two of G, J, and M are hydrogen, the remaining group must be
Figure imgf000019_0001
or be
Figure imgf000019_0002
and at the same time be conjugated to
Figure imgf000019_0003
g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, n, o, h', g', k', j', n', m' are independently 0, 1, or 2 with the provisos that if G = hydrogen or P, g, h, i, h', and g' all equal 0; if J = hydrogen or P, j, k, 1, k', and j' all equal 0; if M = hydrogen or P, m, n, o, n', and m' all equal 0; ifG, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, or O is
Figure imgf000019_0004
then g + g' = 1, h + h' = 1, i = 1, j + j' = 1, k + k' = 1, 1 = 1, m + m' = 1, n + n' = 1, or o = 1, respectively;
if G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, or O is
Figure imgf000020_0001
then g + g' = 2, h + h' = 2, i = 2, j + j' = 2, k + k' = 2, 1 = 2, m + m' = 2, n + n' = 2, or o =
1, respectively; if g' = 0 and G is not hydrogen or P, then h, h', and i equal 0 and g > 0; if g = 0 and G is not hydrogen or P, then g' > 0; if g' > 0 and h' = 0, then i = 0 and h > 0; if g' > 0 and h = 0, then h' > 0 and i > 0; if j' = 0 and J is not hydrogen or P, then k, k', and 1 equal 0 and j > 0; if j = 0 and J is not hydrogen or P, then j ' > 0; ifj' > 0 and k' = 0, then l = 0 and k > 0; if j ' > 0 and k = 0, then k' > 0 and 1 > 0; if m' = 0 and M is not hydrogen or P, then n, n', and o equal 0 and m > 0; if m = 0 and M is not hydrogen or P, then m' > 0; if m' > 0 and n' = 0, then o = 0 and n > 0; if ' > 0 and n = 0, then n' > 0 and o > 0; w and x are independently an integer from 0 (included) to 5 (included); with the proviso that if the compound contains only C and no D, no E, and no F are present, and B = NR1, and G and M are H, and g, h, i, h', g', k, 1, k', 1', m, n, o, n', and m' are 0, and J =
Figure imgf000020_0002
, and j = 2, and Q = -O-CO-, and w and x are 0, and R1, R2, R3, and R4 are
H, then at least one of the leaving groups Z is not connected to Q via an aliphatic amino group. According to another preferred embodiment of the invention the l,(4+2n) electronic cascade spacers W and X are independently selected from compounds having the formula
Figure imgf000021_0001
Q' = -R5C=CR6-, S, O, NR5, -R5C=N~, or -N=CR5- B = NR7, O, S P = C(R3)(R4)Q wherein
Q has no meaning or is -O-CO-; t, u, and y are independently an integer of 0 to 5;
T, U, and Y are independently selected from compounds having the formula:
Figure imgf000021_0002
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, and R9 independently represent H, Cι-6 alkyl, C3- 2o heterocyclyl, C5-2o aryl, Cι-6 alkoxy, hydroxy (OH), amino (NH ), mono-substituted amino (NRXH), di-substituted amino (NRx xRx 2), nitro (NO2), halogen, CF3, CN, CONH , SO2Me, CONHMe, cyclic Cι-5 alkylamino, imidazolyl, Cι-6 alkylpiperazinyl, moφholino, thiol (SH), thioether (SRX), tetrazole, carboxy (COOH), carboxylate (COORx), sulphoxy (S(=O)2OH), sulphonate (S(=O)2ORx), sulphonyl (S(=O)2Rx), sulphixy (S(=O)OH), sulphinate (S(=O)ORx), sulphinyl (S(=O)Rx), phosphonooxy (OP(=O)(OH)2), and phosphate
Figure imgf000021_0003
where Rx, Rx1 and Rx 2 are independently selected from a Cι-6 alkyl group, a C -2o heterocyclyl group or a C5-2o aryl group, two or more of the substituents R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, or R9 optionally being connected" to one another to form one or more aliphatic or aromatic cyclic stractures. In a preferred embodiment leaving groups Z are linked to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via an O, S or aromatic N of the leaving group.
In order to further clarify the above mentioned formulae, compound 26 depicted in figure 13 will serve as an example. This compound is a compound of the formula
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D((A-)aZ)d)c. It contains two generations of double release spacers, to which 4 end groups Z have been coupled. The specifier V is [O], which means that V- B is an oxidized form of B (part of C). Reduction of this functionality induces self- elimination. Such moiety V-B can be chemically reduced, but it can also be reduced under physiological conditions under hypoxic conditions, or by a nitroreductase. Z is paclitaxel. No single release spacer is incorporated in between the specifier [O] and the multiple release spacers, which means that w = x = 0. C is the double release spacer containing the benzylidene-propane-l,3-bis-oxycarbonyl unit, which eliminates according to the principle depicted in figure 8. No cyclization elimination spacer is present, which means that a = 0. Because two double release spacers have been coupled to the first double release spacer, d = c = 2.
In general, multiple release spacers disclosed in this invention possess multiple release characteristics because they are branched on two levels; i) branching on the aromatic ring where both ortho and para-substituents with respect to the location of the specifier can be introduced, and ii) branching by incorporation of additional conjugated double bonds at para and/or ortho positions of the aromatic rings, where the terminal C-atom of the double bond provides a branching point where two leaving groups can be attached. Theoretically, these two elements for branching self-eliminating spacers to obtain multiple release spacers or spacer systems can be infinitely extended.
In addition to incorporation of one or more (generations of) self-eliminating multiple release spacers, it may also be desirable to incorporate a single release, also called unbranched, self-eliminating spacer or spacer system in between the specifier and the first multiple release spacer. This may facilitate the activation step. This single release self-eliminating spacer or spacer system is described by -(W-)W(X-)X. Furthermore, it may be desirable to add single release self-eliminating spacers or spacer systems to a previous generation, coupled to a next generation of multiple release spacers (thus obtaining a previous generation of multiple release spacer systems), or to the highest generation of multiple release spacer(s) before leaving groups Z in order to increase the surface area of the final conjugate. This may increase the number of end groups that can be accommodated and it may also increase the final size of the conjugate, which may go together with certain advantages, such as for example benefiting from the Enhanced Permeability and Retention (EPR) effect. Furthermore, when only aniline- based multiple release spacers are used, connection of single release phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers to a generation of multiple release spacers or, preferably, to the highest generation of multiple release spacers before leaving groups Z enables the release of two or more leaving groups Z that are coupled with their aliphatic amino group to the multiple release spacer system.
When only aniline-based multiple release spacers are used and no single release phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers are incorporated into the multiple release spacer system to which leaving groups Z are coupled with their aliphatic amino group only 1 Z group will be released. This is also true for incorporation of single release aniline- based spacer(s) in the multiple release spacer system to which leaving groups Z are coupled with their aliphatic amino group. Single release spacers that are added to a generation of multiple release spacers, or to the highest generation of multiple release spacer(s) before leaving groups Z or reactive moieties S are represented in the above formulae by -(W-)W(X-)X in P, which is a part of C, D, E, and F.
In general, aniline-based single release or multiple release spacers are preferred over phenol- or thiophenol-based single release or multiple release spacers. The above shows, however that it might sometimes be beneficial to include phenol- or thiophenol- based single release spacer in the multiple release spacer system. For the same reason, it is sometimes beneficial to include phenol- or thiophenol-based multiple release spacers. In general, to release two or more Z groups that are connected to the multiple release spacer or spacer system via an aliphatic amino group, at least one, preferably all, multiple release spacers or spacer systems of either generation C, D (if present), E (if present), or F (if present), preferably the one(s) connected to either A, Z, or S, have to be phenol- or thiophenol-based multiple release spacers or spacer systems, meaning that i) B = O or S for at least one, preferably all, multiple release spacers in that generation, or ii) when B = N for all multiple release spacers in said generation, at least one single release spacer is connected to at least two branches of at least one, preferably all, multiple release spacer in said generation, and B = O or S for at least two of those single release spacers.
In the formulae above, Q is preferably O-CO, but it may also have no meaning. For example, a compound with an aryl ether linkage between self-elimination spacer and leaving group, where the oxycarbonyl function is lacking (Q has no meaning), has been reported to undergo self-elimination as well11.
The principle of 1,6-elimination, as such developed by Carl et al. in 1981, can be considered one of the most versatile self-elimination principles that can be used in prodrag design. According to this principle, spacer elimination proceeds via the mechanism depicted in figure 5. This particular elimination process has proven to be very successful when applied in the prodrug concept. Spacers that self-eliminate through an electronic cascade sequence as indicated in figures 5 and 6 generally show much faster half-lives of elimination than do spacers that eliminate via a cyclization reaction. This is a significant difference between cyclization spacers and electronic cascade spacers.
Elongated self-elimination spacers can be incorporated between a cleavable moiety and leaving group, for example between specifier and drag as disclosed in WO 02/083180 (see also ref. 29). Increasing the length of self-elimination spacers may have (an) additional advantage(s). Self-elimination spacers with increased length may increase the rate and/or efficiency of activation of conjugate or prodrug. As a result, drag release characteristics may be enhanced through long spacers. The self-ehmination spacers or spacer systems of the present invention can also be longer than conventional self- elimination spacers, such as for example the 1,6-elimination spacer, because they are elongated themselves or because multiple self-elimination linkers are combined within one multiple release spacer system. Thus, the spacers or spacer systems of the present invention can be branched, but in addition they can be elongated. Both factors (length and degree of branching) of a spacer or spacer system must be carefully considered when designing conjugates or prodrugs. A high degree of branching may be disadvantageous for the efficiency of activation of the conjugate or prodrag, especially when the branching points are in close proximity to the site of activation. When a high degree of brandling is desirable in order to accommodate many leaving groups Z, it may be beneficial to incorporate single release self-elimination spacers in between the specifier V and the branching point(s). It may increase the efficiency of activation.
Connection of single release spacer(s) to generations of multiple release spacers may enable an increase of the total number of end groups that can be incorporated because the surface of the outer sphere is increased by incorporation of additional single release spacer(s), and as a result more end groups (for example drugs) can be accommodated. To obtain a conjugate or prodrag that possesses the desired properties, a considered choice of a specific multiple release spacer or spacer system optionally including one or more single release self-elimination spacers, must be made.
The novel self-eliminating multiple release spacers disclosed in this invention may be coupled to one another to yield multiple release spacer systems in which the spacers are coupled through aryl-carbamate functions, by employing hydroxybenzotriazole as a catalyst to couple an aromatic amine to a p-nitrophenyl carbonate.
The invention is in another aspect related to compounds of the above-mentioned formulas wherein A is a cyclization spacer, further called ω-amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacer having a formula selected from
Figure imgf000025_0001
wherein: a is an integer of 0 or 1 ; and b is an integer of 0 or 1 ; and c is an integer of 0 or 1; provided that a + b + c = 2 or 3; and wherein R1 and R2 independently represent H, Cι-6 alkyl, said alkyl being optionally substituted with one or more of the following groups: hydroxy (OH), ether (ORx), amino (NH2), mono-substituted amino (NRXH), di-substituted amino (NRx'Rx 2), nitro (NO2), halogen, CF3, CN, CONH2, SO2Me, CONHMe, cyclic Cι-5 alkylamino, imidazolyl, Cι-6 alkylpiperazinyl, morpholino, thiol (SH), thioether (SRX), tetrazole, carboxy (COOH), carboxylate (COORx), sulphoxy (S(=O)2OH), sulphonate (S(O)20Rx), sulphonyl (S(=O)2Rx), sulphixy (S(=O)OH), sulphinate (S(=O)ORx), sulphinyl (S(=O)Rx), phosphonooxy (OP(=O)(OH)2), and phosphate (OP(=O)(ORx)2), where Rx, Rx 1 and Rx 2 are selected from a Cι-6 alkyl group, a C3-20 heterocyclyl group or a C5. o aryl group;
R2 has no meaning when S has no meaning, which means that a double bond is present between the rightmost nitrogen atom and the carbonyl group (N=C=O); and R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 independently represent H, Cι-6 alkyl, C3-20 heterocyclyl, C5- o aryl, Cι-6 alkoxy, hydroxy (OH), amino (NH2), mono-substituted amino (NRXH), di- substituted amino (NR^Rx 2), nitro (NO2), halogen, CF3, CN, CONH2, SO2Me, CONHMe, cyclic C1-5 alkylamino, imidazolyl, Cι-6 alkylpiperazinyl, morpholino, thiol (SH), thioether (SRX), tetrazole, carboxy (COOH), carboxylate (COORx), sulphoxy (S(=O)2OH), sulphonate (S(=O)2ORx), sulphonyl (S(=O)2Rx), sulphixy (S(=O)OH), sulphinate (S(=O)ORx), sulphinyl (S(=O)Rx), phosphonooxy (OP(=O)(OH)2), and phosphate (OP(=O)(ORx)2), where Rx, Rx and Rx are selected from a Cι-6 alkyl group, a C3-2o heterocyclyl group or a C5-2o aryl group; and wherein R , R , R , R , R , R , R , and R can be a part of one or more aliphatic or aromatic cyclic structures, two or more of the substituents R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, or R8 optionally being connected to one another to form one or more aliphatic or aromatic cyclic structures.
The ω-amino group of the ω-amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacer A does not need to be in close proximity to a particular electron-withdrawing substituent nor does it need to be an aromatic nitrogen, when it is connected to a multiple release spacer system that contains phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers in one generation, preferably in the highest generation (which is the one connected to A, Z, or S). The ω-amino group of the ω-amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacer should possess sufficient leaving group ability. In a preferred embodiment the ω-amino group of the ω- amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacer is an N-aryl or an aliphatic N wherein the N is positioned in proximity of an electron-withdrawing group, such that the electron- withdrawing group can properly exert its electron-withdrawing property so that the leaving group ability of the ω-amino group is increased. The nucleophilicity of the leaving amino group should however be sufficient to allow for a sufficiently fast cyclization reaction.
In a fiirther embodiment the invention relates to a compound, wherein group A is an ω- amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacer, and Z is a moiety coupled via its hydroxyl group to A.
Preferred compounds according to the invention are those wherein (W-)W(X-)XCC ,
(W-)w(X-)xC(Dd)c,
(W-)w(X-)χC(D(Ee)d)c or
(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E(Ff)e)d)c is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000027_0001
Figure imgf000028_0001
0 -TC
Figure imgf000028_0003
Figure imgf000028_0002
Figure imgf000028_0004
Figure imgf000029_0001
Figure imgf000030_0001
Figure imgf000031_0001
Figure imgf000032_0001
Figure imgf000033_0001
Figure imgf000034_0001
Figure imgf000035_0001
R1=OorOC(0)0 and from the compounds depicted above wherein single release 1,6-elimination p- aminobenzyloxycarbonyl spacer(s) are replaced by single release 1,8-eliminationp- aminocinnamyloxycarbonyl spacer(s).
In a further embodiment the compounds depicted in the previous paragraph further comprise ω-amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacers A.
The invention also relates to the self-eliminating multiple release spacers or spacer systems per se as described in this invention. The invention thus relates to compounds as defined above without specifier V and with Z or S is H or OH, exemplified by for instance aminotriol 16 (fig 11) and aminodiol 23 (fig 13), extending to spacer systems comprising more than one spacer.
Also the invention relates to derivatives of the self-eliminating multiple release spacers or spacer systems per se that can be used for facilitating coupling with specifiers, leaving groups, reactive moieties or spacers. For instance an amino group may be derivatized as its isocyanate and an alcohol group may be derivatized as its p- nitrophenyl carbonate. Other derivatizations are well within the knowledge of the skilled person. One end of the spacer or spacer system must be able to react with the specifier, for example the tripeptide that is a substrate for plasmin. Typically, this end of the spacer or spacer system is an amino group or a hydroxyl group, but it can also be another functionality. The functionalities at the other end of the linker or linker system must be able to react with the leaving group Z (the drag). Typically, these ends of the multiple release spacer or spacer system are hydroxyl groups, but they can also be other functionalities. In one embodiment, these functionalities react with the hydroxyl group of the drag to form for example carbonate linkages between linker and drag. In another embodiment, these functionalities react with the aromatic amino group of the drag to form for example N-aryl carbamate linkages between linker and drug. In again another embodiment, these functionalities react with the sulfhydryl group of the drug to form for example oxycarbonylthio linkages between linker and drag. In again another embodiment these functionalities react with the carboxylic acid group of the drag. If spacers A are included in the spacer system, typically the hydroxyl group of the drag is reacted with A to form carbamate linkages between A and Z.
In the compounds of the invention the specifier V typically contains a substrate molecule that is specifically cleaved by an enzyme present in the vicinity of or inside the target cells, for example tumor cells. More preferably, the specifier V contains a substrate that is specifically cleaved by an enzyme present at elevated levels in the vicinity of or inside the target cells as compared to other parts of the body, and most preferably the enzyme is present only in the vicinity of or inside the target cells. In an embodiment suitably the specifier V constitutes a targeting moiety in order to target the compounds to specific cells.
In the compounds of the invention, the specifier V may also contain a reactive moiety that can react with a targeting moiety that can target the resulting compounds to the target site by selective binding to a receptor or other receptive moiety associated with a given target cell population or by causing accumulation of the compounds of the invention in the vicinity of or inside the target cells by another mechanism. In case these compounds contain two or more reactive moieties S, the compounds are from hereon called "bifunctional linkers". When the compounds comprise two or more moieties Z, the compounds are from hereon called "monofunctional spacer-leaving group conjugates". Both bifunctional linkers and monofunctional spacer-leaving group conjugates can be used to prepare prodrugs of the present invention that contain a specifier with a targeting group as well as a substrate specifically cleavable at the target site, a multiple release spacer system and two or more leaving groups Z. Although in this invention spacers and spacer systems are described that are able to release multiple leaving groups, it is obvious that monofunctional spacer-leaving group conjugates and bifunctional linkers can also be designed that contain single release spacers and spacer systems, such as for example described in WO 02/83180 and EP 1243276, which are incorporated by reference.
In an aspect of the invention, the reactive moiety in V is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a targeting moiety, e.g., a thiol group, an amino group, or an aldehyde group, to form a new specifier V that contains a targeting moiety. In a preferred aspect of the invention, the reactive moiety in V is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a protein or protein fragment, e.g., a thiol group, an amino group, or an aldehyde group, to form a new specifier V that contains a protein or a protein fragment as the targeting moiety. In a more preferred aspect of the invention, the reactive moiety in V is reacted with a nucleophilic group on an antibody or antibody fragment, e.g., a thiol group, an amino group, or an aldehyde group, to form a new specifier V that contains an antibody or antibody fragment as the targeting moiety.
In another more preferred aspect of the invention, the reactive moiety in V is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a peptide vector or receptor-binding moiety, e.g., a thiol group, an amino group, or an aldehyde group, to form a new specifier V that contains a peptide vector or receptor-binding moiety as the targeting moiety.
In a preferred embodiment the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation,
Figure imgf000038_0001
wherein X is een leaving group. These reactive moieties can be used to couple a targeting moiety having a nucleophilic group, e.g., a thiol group, to the specifier V having such a reactive moiety to form a new specifier V that contains a targeting moiety. In a more preferred embodiment of the invention, the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation,
Figure imgf000038_0002
and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a protein or protein fragment, e.g., a thiol group, to form a new specifier V that contains a protein or a protein fragment as the targeting moiety.
In another more preferred embodiment of the invention, the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation,
Figure imgf000039_0001
and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on an antibody or antibody fragment, e.g., a thiol group, to form a new specifier V that contains an antibody or antibody fragment as the targeting moiety.
In another more preferred embodiment of the invention, the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation,
Figure imgf000039_0002
and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a peptide vector or receptor-binding moiety, e.g., a thiol group, to form a new specifier V that contains a peptide vector or a receptor-binding moiety as the targeting moiety.
In another preferred embodiment, the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an activated ester such as a N-hydroxysuccinimide ester, a/7-nitrophenyl ester, a pentafluorophenyl ester, and further an isothiocyanate, isocyanate, anhydride, acid chloride, sulfonyl chloride, or aldehyde. These reactive moieties can be used to couple a targeting moiety having a nucleophilic group, e.g., an amino group, to the specifier V having such a reactive moiety to form a new specifier V that contains a targeting moiety. In a more preferred embodiment of the invention, the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an activated ester such as a N-hydroxysuccinimide ester, a ?-nitrophenyl ester, a pentafluorophenyl ester, and further an isothiocyanate, isocyanate, anhydride, acid chloride, sulfonyl chloride, or aldehyde, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a protein or protein fragment, e.g., an amino group, to form a new specifier V that contains a protein or a protein fragment as the targeting moiety. In another more preferred embodiment of the invention, the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an activated ester such as a N-hydroxysuccinimide ester, ap- nitrophenyl ester, a pentafluorophenyl ester, and further an isothiocyanate, isocyanate, anhydride, acid chloride, sulfonyl chloride, or aldehyde, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on an antibody or antibody fragment, e.g., an amino group, to form a new specifier V that contains an antibody or antibody fragment as the targeting moiety.
In another more preferred embodiment of the invention, the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an activated ester such as a N-hydroxysuccimmide ester, ap- nitrophenyl ester, a pentafluorophenyl ester, and further an isothiocyanate, isocyanate, anhydride, acid chloride, sulfonyl chloride, or aldehyde, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a peptide vector or receptor-binding moiety, e.g., an amino group, to form a new specifier V that contains a peptide vector or a receptor-binding moiety as the targeting moiety.
In another preferred embodiment, the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an amino group or a hydrazine group. These reactive moieties can be used to couple a targeting moiety having a nucleophilic group, e.g., an aldehyde group, to the specifier V having such a reactive moiety to form a new specifier V that contains a targeting moiety.
In a more preferred embodiment of the invention, the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an amino group or a hydrazine group, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a protein or protein fragment, e.g., an aldehyde group, to form a new specifier V that contains a protein or a protein fragment as the targeting moiety.
In another more preferred embodiment of the invention, the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an amino group or a hydrazine group, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on an antibody or antibody fragment, e.g., an aldehyde group, to form a new specifier V that contains an antibody or antibody fragment as the targeting moiety.
In another more preferred embodiment of the invention, the reactive moiety in V is, without limitation, an amino group or a hydrazine group, and is reacted with a nucleophilic group on a peptide vector or receptor-binding moiety, e.g., an aldehyde group, to form a new specifier V that contains a peptide vector or a receptor-binding moiety as the targeting moiety.
The specifier V may also contain a moiety that targets the compounds of the invention to the target site by selective binding to a receptor or other receptive moiety associated with a given target cell population or by causing accumulation of the compounds of the invention in the vicinity of or inside the target cells by another mechanism. This targeting moiety may, for example, be bombesin, transferrin, gastrin, gastrin-releasing peptide, a molecule that specifically binds vβ3 and/or αvβ5-integrin receptors, such as RGD-containing peptides, platelet-derived growth factor, IL-2, IL-6, a tumor growth factor, vaccinia growth factor, insulin and insulin-like growth factors I en II, an antigen-recognizing immunoglobulin or an antigen-recognizing fragment thereof, or a carbohydrate. Preferably, that antigen recognized by the immunoglobulin (or fragment thereof) is specific for the target cells, e.g. a tumor-specific antigen.
In one embodiment, the specifier V contains a di-, tri-, or oligopeptide which consists of an amino acid sequence specifically recognized and thus cleavable by a protease, for example plasmin, a cathepsin, cathepsin B, prostate-specific antigen (PSA), urokinase- type plasminogen activator (u-PA), or a member of the family of matrix metalloproteinases, present in the vicinity of or inside the target cells, for example tumor cells. Typically, the specifier V contains a substrate for the serine protease plasmin.
In another embodiment, V contains a substrate for one or more of the cathepsins, typically cathepsin B. In again another embodiment, V contains a β-glucuronide that is specifically recognized by β-glucuronidase present in the vicinity of or inside tumor cells. In again another embodiment the specifier is [O], yielding for example a nitro group that can be reduced under hypoxic conditions or by nitroreductases. In another embodiment V is a nitro-(hetero)aromatic moiety, for example nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl. After reduction of the nitro group or removal of the nitro-aromatic specifier, elimination of the spacers or spacer systems described in this invention leads to drag release. It can be understood that any specifier that is specifically cleaved following recognition by a disease-specific and or organ-specific and/or specifically targeted enzyme and/or receptor can be incoφorated into conjugates and prodrugs that contain the spacers or spacer systems claimed in this invention.
In one embodiment the invention relates to a compound wherein the specifier V contains a tripeptide. Preferably the tripeptide is linked via its C-terminus to the self- eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system. More preferably the C-terminal amino acid residue of the tripeptide is selected from arginine and lysine, the middle amino acid residue of the tripeptide is selected from alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, methionine, phenylalanine, cyclohexylglycine, tryptophan and proline, and the N- terminal amino acid residue of the tripeptide is selected from a D-amino acid residue and a protected L-amino acid residue including protected glycine.
In a further embodiment the specifier V is selected from D-alanylphenylalanyllysine, D-valylleucyllysine, D-alanylleucyllysine, D-valylphenylalanyllysine, D- valyltryptophanyllysme and D-alanyltryptophanyllysine.
It should be noted that specifier V, either in the form of a di-, tri-or oligopeptide, or in any other form, may contain protective groups. Such compounds comprising protected specifier V may not, when contacted with for instance specifier specific enzymes, release the leaving groups. However, when deprotected and suitably activated such compounds will release leaving groups and thus such compounds comprising protected specifier V also fall under the scope of this invention. In particular the above can be envisaged in relation to the bifunctional or monofunctional compounds V-(W-)w(X-)xC((A-)aS)c, V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D((A-)aS)d)c,
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E((A-)aS)e)d)c,
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E(F((A-)aS)f)e)d)c
V-(W-)w(X-)χC((A-)aZ)c,
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D((A-)aZ)d)c, V-(W-)w(X-)χC(D(E((A-)aZ)e)d)c, and
V-(W-)w(X-)χC(D(E(F((A-)aZ)f)e)d)c mentioned earlier. Suitable protective groups for chemical functional groups, in particular for amino acids, are well known to the organic chemist and may for example be found in T.W. Greene, Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1981.
In yet a further embodiment the invention relates to a compound wherein the specifier V is an amino-terminal capped peptide covalently linked via the C-terminus to the self- eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system. Preferably the specifier V is selected from benzyloxycarbonylphenylalanyllysine, benzyloxycarbonylvalyllysine, D- phenylalanylphenylalanyllysine, benzyloxycarbonylvalylcitralline, tert- butyloxycarbonylphenylalanyllysine, benzyloxycarbonylalanylarginylarginine, benzyloxycarbonylphenylalanyl-N-tosylarginine, 2- aminoethylthiosuccinimidopropionylvalinylcitralline, 2- aminoethylthiosuccinimidopropionyllysylphenylalanyllysine, acetylphenylalanyllysine, andbenzyloxycarbonylphenylalanyl-O-benzoylthreonine.
The moiety Z is preferably a therapeutic or diagnostic moiety, but it can also be a hydrogen or OH group or a reactive moiety. A H or OH group or a reactive moiety may be accidentally introduced in a final conjugate during its synthesis, in case final coupling of leaving groups to the multiple release spacer or spacer system does not proceed completely. H or OH groups will not act as leaving group, but are not expected to inhibit elimination of leaving groups Z.
Z can for instance be an anticancer drag, an antibiotic, an anti-inflammatory agent, or an anti-viral agent. Typically, the moiety Z is an anticancer drag. Preferably the anticancer drag is the hydroxyl containing etoposide, camptothecin, irinotecan (CPT- 11), SN-38, topotecan, 9-aminocamptothecin, 9-nitrocamptothecin, 10- hydroxycamptothecin, GG211, lurtotecan, combrestatin, paclitaxel, docetaxel, esperamycin, l,8-dihydroxy-bicyclo[7.3.1]trideca-4-ene-2,6-diyne-13-one, anguidine, doxorubicin, morpholine-doxorabicin, N-(5,5-diacetoxypentyl) doxorubicin, daunorabicin, epirabicin, idarabicin, mitoxantrone, vincristine, vinblastine.. tallysomycin, bleomycin, 4-bis(2-chloroethyl)aminophenol, 4-bis(2- fluoroethyl)aminophenol, and derivatives thereof.
The anticancer drag can also be the sulfhydryl containing esperamicin, 6- mercaptopurine, or derivatives thereof. The anticancer drag can also be the carboxyl containing methofrexate, aminopterin, camptothecin (ring-opened form of the lactone), chlorambucil, melphalan, butyric acid and retinoic acid, and derivatives thereof. The anticancer drag can also be the aziridine amino containing or aromatic amino containing mitomycin C, mitomycin A, an anthracycline derivative containing an amine functionality with sufficient leaving group ability, mitoxantrone, 9- aminocamptothecin, methofrexate, aminopterin, tallysomycin, bleomycin, actinomycin, N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)-p-ρhenylenediamine, N,N-bis(2-fluoroethyl)-p- phenylenediamine, deoxycytidine, cytosine arabinoside, gemcitabine, and derivatives thereof. The anticancer drag can also be the aliphatic amino-containing daunorabicin, doxorubicin, epirabicin, idarabicin, N-(5,5-diacetoxypentyl)doxorabicin, an anthracycline, N8-acetyl spermidine, l-(2-chloroethyl)-l,2-dimethanesulfonyl hydrazine, or derivatives thereof.
In one embodiment Z is selected from paclitaxel, docetaxel, or a derivative thereof, which is coupled to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via its 2'-hydroxyl group. In a further embodiment Z is selected from camptothecin, irinotecan (CPT-11), SN-38, topotecan, 9-aminocamptothecin, 9-nitrocamptothecin, 10-hydroxycamptothecin, GG211, lurtotecan, or a derivative thereof, which is coupled to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via its 20-hydroxyl group. In yet a further embodiment Z is selected from SN-38, topotecan, 10- hydroxycamptothecin, etoposide, 4-bis(2-chloroethyl)aminophenol, 4-bis(2- fluoroethyl)aminophenol, combrestatin, or a derivative thereof, which is coupled to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via its phenolic hydroxyl group. In a further embodiment Z is selected from 9-aminocamptothecin, N,N-bis(2- chloroethyl)-p-phenylenediamine, N,N-bis(2-fluoroethyl)-p-phenylenediamine, or a derivative thereof, which is coupled to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via its aromatic primary amine group, hi yet a further embodiment Z is selected from doxorubicin, daunorabicin, epirabicin, idarabicin, or a derivative thereof, which is coupled to the self-elimination multiple release spacer (system) via its aliphatic amino group, provided that at least one generation of the multiple release spacer system, preferably the highest generation, contains phenol- or thiophenol based spacers.
The moiety S is a reactive moiety that enables coupling of moieties Z to the multiple release spacer (system). When the moiety S is connected via a carbonyl group to the multiple release spacer or spacer system, suitable S moieties include, without limitation, N-succinimidyl-N-oxide, /7-nitrophenoxide, pentafluorophenoxide, carboxylates, halides, and sulfonates. When the moiety S is directly connected to the methylene group of the multiple release spacer system, suitable S moieties include, without limitation, halides and sulfonates. The moiety S may also be H or OH, in which case coupling to Z occurs by in situ conversion of S to a reactive moiety which is then substituted by Z in the same reaction mixture.
The compounds of the invention that contain two or more moieties S can be used to prepare the compounds of the invention that contain two or more moieties Z. When the compounds of the invention that contain two or more moieties S contain a specifier V that also contains a reactive moiety, the compounds have been named bifunctional linkers. When the compounds of the invention that contain two or more moieties S contain a specifier V that does not contain a reactive moiety, the compounds are from hereon called "monofunctional specifier-spacer conjugates". Although in this invention spacers and spacer systems are described that are able to release multiple leaving groups, it is obvious that monofunctional specifier-spacer conjugates and bifunctional linkers can also be designed that contain single release spacers and spacer systems, such as for example described in WO 02/83180 and EP 1243276, which are incorporated by reference.
Preferred compounds according to the invention are those selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000045_0001
Figure imgf000046_0001
Figure imgf000047_0001
-o-
Figure imgf000047_0002
Figure imgf000048_0001
Figure imgf000049_0001
Figure imgf000050_0001
Figure imgf000051_0001
and salts thereof.
A compound consisting of an amino-terminal capped peptide covalently linked via one single ^-NH-Ph-CH=C(CH2OCO-)2 spacer to two doxorubicin molecules is excluded from the scope of this invention. Further compounds consisting of an amino-terminal capped peptide covalently linked via one single -NH-Ph -CH=C(CH2OCO-)2 spacer to two anticancer drag molecules may or may not be excluded from the scope of this invention.
When an enzyme needs to be quantitatively detected, incorporation of a multiple release spacer or spacer system into a compound or conjugate that is enzymatically cleaved by said enzyme increases the sensitivity of such an assay as one enzymatic cleavage can liberate numerous detectable molecules.
Detection or determination of an enzyme, for example a protease, in a sample can be performed by incubating the sample with a compound containing a multiple release spacer or spacer system according to this invention, which is a substrate for the (proteolytic) enzyme, and observing (proteolytic) cleavage of said substrate. The phrase "determining an enzyme" means both qualitative analysis, i.e. detecting the presence of the enzyme, determining whether it is present, and quantitative analysis, i.e. quantifying the enzyme, determining the enzyme activity present in the sample.
For many proteases chromogenic or fluorogenic peptide substrates have been devised which are often commercially available. In many cases, for example in case of serine proteases, the enzymes do not recognize the sequence which is C-terminal to the hydrolyzed bond. This part can be replaced by a chromogenic or fluorogenic leaving group like p-nitroaniline or β-naphtylamine. Such chromogenic or fluorogenic compounds can serve as leaving group Z in compounds of the present invention. The multiple release spacer or spacer system may increase the sensitivity that can be obtained for detection and quantification of physiological concentrations of enzymes in biological fluids or tissue-extracts.
An enzyme can also be indirectly determined via its pro-enzyme containing a recognition site, e.g., an activation site, cleavable by said enzyme to be determined. Cleavage of the pro-enzyme can in such case be detected by observing the resulting activity using a suitable substrate of the activated pro-enzyme, the substrate containing a multiple release spacer or spacer system of the present invention.
In one embodiment the invention relates to a diagnostic assay process in which a compound according to the invention is used.
In a further embodiment the invention relates to a process in which the presence or amount of an enzyme is determined by using a compound according to the invention.
In yet a further embodiment the invention relates to a process in which the presence or amount of a protease is determined by using a compound according to the invention.
In a further embodiment the invention relates to a process in which the compound according to the invention that is used comprises a substrate for said protease and leaving group Z is detected.
In yet a further embodiment the invention relates to a process in which the compound according to the invention that is used comprises a substrate for an enzyme, which is the product of cleavage of its pro-enzyme precursor by said protease and leaving group Z is detected.
The specifier V may also comprise a polymer, such as for example poly[N-(2-hydroxy- propyl)methacrylamide] (poly-HPMA), poly-glutamic acid (poly-L-glutamic acid
(PG)), or poly(ethylene) glycol (PEG), which causes accumulation of compounds of the invention in the vicinity of or inside the target cells, e.g. tumor cells, because of the Enhanced Permeability and Retention (EPR) effect. These polymers may as such be regarded as a targeting moiety. Two or more molecules of the invention may also be coupled to a central (core) monomeric or polymeric molecule to obtain a larger structure that could accumulate as a result of the EPR effect, in addition to other mechanisms of accumulation. Suitable polymers are for example poly[N-(2-hydroxy- propyl)methacrylamide] (poly-HPMA), poly-glutamic acid (poly-L-glutamic acid (PG)), or poly(ethylene) glycol (PEG). Thus the invention also relates to a composite structure comprising two or more compounds according to the invention, connected with a polymeric structure.
Structures of multiple release spacers are disclosed that can serve as suitable monomers to constract the multiple release dendrimeric prodrugs or (bio)conjugates. A suitable monomer is able to release 2 or more leaving groups after activation. One herein disclosed structure of such multiple release monomer is depicted in figure 7. Triple release from this monomer, as depicted in figure 7, is based on the principles of unbranched 1,4- and 1,6-elimination spacers . After unmasking of the amine of 1
(figure 7), 2 can undergo an electronic cascade reaction, after which the reactive non- aromatic species 3 is immediately trapped by a nucleophile, such as for example water, to regenerate the aromatic amine function in 4. This process of self-elimination and trapping is repeated two more times, after which three leaving groups L-H have been liberated. The sequence in which the three electronic cascade elimination reactions take place as depicted in figure 7 was chosen randomly, hi fact, the tliree fragmentations (two 1,4-eliminations and one 1,6-elimination) may occur in any random order. Employing n generations of this monomer, cascade dendrimers can potentially be constructed that contain 3" end groups.
Figure 8 depicts the principle of drag release from a double release spacer. Self- elimination of this double release spacer is based on 1,8-elimination. Deprotection of the amino group in 7, affording 8, sets the stage for 2 1,8-elimination reactions releasing 2 leaving groups L-H.
An amine or hydroxylamine can be generated from a masked amine through reduction of a nitro function to the corresponding hydroxylamine or amine function. Both the hydroxylamine and the amine derivatives induce self-elimination of the spacer. To deliver proof of principle for multiple release of leaving groups from conjugates and prodrugs containing a multiple release spacer or spacer system as disclosed herein, compounds were synthezised that contain multiple leaving groups coupled as end groups to one or two generations of multiple release spacers. These compounds were to release the leaving groups upon reduction of the nitro group attached to the aromatic ring at the center of the multiple release linker or linker system. Reduction of the nitro group to the corresponding hydroxylamine or amine should trigger the multiple release cascade and simultaneously liberate all leaving groups. Alternatively, removal of an Aloe protecting group to unmask the amine can trigger self-elimination. In addition to serving as compounds to deliver proof of principle, the synthesized nitroaromatic compounds that contain antitumor drags, such as paclitaxel, as leaving groups can be considered for application in selective drag targeting to hypoxic areas in tumors, where the nitro group will be reduced. Alternatively, these compounds can be used as conjugates and prodrugs that are activated by nitroreductases which are targeted to tumor cells through one of the directed enzyme prodrag therapy (DEPT) approaches. The synthesis of these compounds is disclosed.
The triple release building blocks nitrotriol 11 (figure 9) and aminotriol 16 (figure 11) can be synthesized following a number of routes. Several approaches to obtain the corresponding amino-tri-methylester or amino-tri-carboxylic acid have been reported starting from for example nitromesitylene31.
Synthesis of the double release building block nitrodiol 20 (figure 12) has been reported in the literature32. The double release building block aminodiol 23 (figure 13) can be synthesized by reduction of the nitro group of 2-p-nitrobenzylidene propane- 1,3- diol 20.
Proof of principle of triple release should be delivered with a monomeric model compound with a stracture similar to 1 (figure 7). To obtain such a compound, nitrotriol 11 was activated with excess -nitrophenyl chloroformate in the presence of diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) and pyridine to yield triply activated compound 12 (figure 9).33 Triply activated 12 was subsequently reacted with benzyl alcohol to yield model compound 13, or with phenethyl alcohol to yield model compound 14. Triply activated 12 was also reacted with benzylamine to obtain model compound 15 (figure 10).
In order to obtain model compound 19 (figure 11), aminotriol 16 was N-protected with an Aloe group to yield 17, subsequently triply activated with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate to yield 18, and coupled with propylamine.
Proof of principle for the fact that the dual release spacer with a stracture similar to 10 (figure 8) can indeed release both leaving groups is also disclosed in this invention. For this purpose, nitrodiol 20 was doubly activated with excess p-nitrophenyl chloroformate in the presence of diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) and pyridine to yield doubly activated compound 21 (figure 12). Doubly activated 21 was subsequently reacted with paclitaxel to yield the desired model compound 22.
In addition to delivering proof of principle for double release from a spacer with a stracture similar to 10 (figure 8), a model compound was synthesized for delivering proof of principle for release of 4 leaving groups from a multiple release prodrag or (bio)coηjugate containing 2 generations of double release spacers. For this purpose, two molecules of aminodiol 23 were coupled to doubly activated 21 using HOBt as a catalyst to yield tetraol 24 (figure 13). Tetraol 24 was quadraply activated with excess -nitrophenyl chloroformate in the presence of diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) and pyridine to yield quadraply activated compound 25. Quadraply activated 25 was subsequently reacted with paclitaxel to yield the desired model compound 26.
Doubly activated 21 was also reacted with benzylamine to yield model compound 27 (figure 14). To synthesize additional model compounds, doubly activated 21 was also reacted with the single release 1,6-elimination spacer to yield 28 (figure 15), which was subsequently activated using p-nitrophenyl chloroformate to yield 29. Doubly activated 29 was reacted with p-methoxybenzylamine, p-chlorobenzylamine, or phenethyl alcohol, to yield model compounds 30, 31, and 32, respectively (figure 16). To obtain a reference compound for demonstration of single 1,6-elimination, p- nitrobenzyl chloroformate 33 was reacted with benzylamine to yield model compound 34 (figure 17).
Two other reference compounds were also prepared (figure 18). Dibenzyl carbonate 35 and 2'-O-cinnamyloxycarbonylpaclitaxel 36 were synthesized as reference compounds to demonstrate that these compounds remain intact upon treatment with conditions that are necessary for reduction of the nitro function of the model compounds described above.
Although the conjugates, test compounds, and reference compounds are based on aniline-based spacers, it is obvious to one skilled in the art that similar compounds containing one or more phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers can be prepared analogously.
In order to deliver proof of principle for release of all three leaving groups, 13 and 14 were unmasked by reduction of the nitro group using zinc in the presence of acetic acid (figure 19). Within one hour thin layer chromatography indicated complete disappearance of starting compound and formation of a substantial amount of benzyl alcohol or phenethyl alcohol. NMR spectra of the products indicated complete formation of free benzyl alcohol or phenethyl alcohol, no signals from benzyl carbonate or phenethyl carbonate protons being present.
When the nitro function of model compound 15 was reduced (figure 20), thin layer chromatography indicated formation of a single product. However, formation of benzylamine was not or hardly observed. According to NMR, maximally 33 percent of benzylamine was released from 15.
Treatment of the model compound 19 (figure 21) with palladiumtetrakistriphenylphosphine and morpholine resulted in disappearance of starting compound within one hour. However, again no complete release of propylamine was observed. In order to deliver proof of principle for release of both paclitaxel leaving groups, 22 was unmasked by reduction of the nitro group using zinc in the presence of acetic acid (figure 22). Within 30 minutes thin layer chromatography indicated complete disappearance of starting compound and formation of a substantial amount of paclitaxel. An NMR spectrum of the product indicated complete formation of free paclitaxel, no signals from paclitaxel-2'-carbonate protons were present.
A similar reduction of the nitro group of the model compound 26, containing 2 generations of multiple release spacers and containing 4 paclitaxel units, led to complete disappearance of starting material within 30 minutes and a substantial amount of paclitaxel was formed according to thin layer chromatography (figure 23). Also in this case, an NMR spectrum of the product indicated complete formation of free paclitaxel.
Treatment of model compound 27, containing benzylamine as leaving groups (figure 24), with zinc showed disappearance of starting compound. However, again no complete release of benzylamine was observed.
Also model compounds 30 and 31, containing aliphatic amine leaving groups (p- methoxybenzylamine or p-chlorobenzylamine), were reduced. In both cases, within 30 min, the starting compound was converted into a single product, however, again no free amine was formed.
When the phenethyl alcohol leaving group containing compound 32 was reduced under the same conditions, the product showed to be completely converted into free phenethyl alcohol, as observed by 1H-NMR..
To verify whether the single release single release 1,6-elimination spacer self- eliminates when the leaving group is an aliphatic amine, compound 34 was reduced. NMR indicated complete release of benzylamine.
The reference compounds 35 and 36 were also treated with zinc and acetic acid (figure 28). According to ^-NMR both compounds did not show any degradation, which demonstrates that the liberation of leaving groups from the nitro-containing model compounds is not due to unwanted side reactions.
From some reduction products of aliphatic amine leaving group containing model compounds, NMR or thin layer chromatography showed in some cases after 1 - 3 months following nitro reduction or Aloe deprotection, that percentages of liberated leaving group remained unchanged. In each case, no more than one equivalent of aliphatic amine was released. Both the herein disclosed double and triple release aniline-based multiple release spacers are not able to release more than one leaving group, if the leaving group is an aliphatic amine. The multiple release stractures as depicted in figures 7 and 8 have been shown in this invention to possess multiple release characteristics when the leaving group is an aromatic amine or an oxygen (hydroxyl). Apparently, the extent of electron-withdrawing capacity of the leaving groups determines whether more than one leaving group can be liberated from the herein disclosed spacers. When the multiple release spacer is a phenol- or thiophenol- based multiple release spacer or when the multiple release spacer is coupled to single release phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers, aliphatic amines are also suitable leaving groups and release of all aliphatic amine leaving groups does occur. Aliphatic alcohols prove to be suitable leaving groups (e.g., from H2N-C6H -CH=C(CH2-O-CO-2'-O- paclitaxel)2 two molecules of paclitaxel are released) and therefore release of phenol- based spacers, to which an aliphatic amine leaving group is connected, from a multiple release spacer (e.g., H2N-C6H4-CH=C(CH2-O-C(O)O-C6H4-CH2OC(O)NR1R2)2) occurs by virtue of their increased leaving capability with respect to aliphatic alcohols. As elimination of aliphatic amines from hydroxybenzyl-based spacer-aliphatic amine conjugates is known10, release of aliphatic amines from spacer systems in which the aliphatic amine is directly connected to a phenol-based spacer takes place as well.
Upon removal or transformation of the specifier V in the compounds or prodrugs disclosed in this invention, thus upon unmasking of B of the branched spacer or spacer system coupled to V, under physiological conditions, the reactive intermediate(s) formed after self-elimination is (are) likely to be trapped by water, thereby regenerating molecules like aminodiol 23 and/or aminotriol 16. When a multiple release conjugate or prodrag constructed with one of the monomers disclosed in this invention is used for drag delivery purposes, the degradation products of the prodrag or (bio)conjugate after the multiple self- elimination cascade must be non-toxic (except from drags to be released in tumor targeting approaches). Therefore, we have tested the aminotriol monomer 16 and aminodiol monomer 23 for their cytotoxicity in a panel of seven well-characterized human tumor cell lines. Both compounds turned out to be non-toxic (see example 33).
The total attainable number of end groups (e.g., drag moieties) per dendrimeric prodrag or conjugate may be restricted by steric conditions. When incorporation of multiple large bioactive end groups is desired, it is likely that only several generations of multiple release monomeric spacers can be used. The number of end groups that can be incorporated may be increased by addition of additional unbranched self-elimination spacer(s) (systems) to a generation of multiple release spacers or to the highest generation of multiple release spacer(s) before leaving groups Z in order to enlarge the outer sphere surface, thereby enabling attachment of more end groups.
The electronic cascade self-elimination process of 4-aminobenzyl alcohol 1,6- elimination spacers is known to proceed with a short half-live. This is an important factor in drag delivery applications of self-elimination spacers, as fast drag release after site-specific activation is required. When a slower release of leaving groups is desired, the spacer monomer may be tuned such that the spacer elimination process is retarded. This can be of use when the functional multiple release spacers or spacer systems of this invention are used for controlled release purposes.
Unbranched and branched monomeric aminobenzyloxycarbonyl and related electronic cascade spacers or spacer systems can be coupled to a next generation of monomeric spacers via carbamate bonds, which are presumably more stable under physiological conditions than ester or carbonate bonds34.
In the present invention, the synthesis and application of new multiple release spacers and spacer systems is described. In one embodiment, the dual or triple release monomer(s) employed in the multiple release prodrag or (bio)conjugate release the end groups (drags) through several consecutive 1,4-, 1,6-, or 1,8-eliminations. Proof of principle of double or triple self-elimination was delivered upon chemical reduction of the nitrobenzyl or nitrocinnamyl derivatives containing benzyl alcohol, phenethyl alcohol, or paclitaxel as leaving groups (figures 19, 22, 23, 26). Complete release was observed by thin layer chromatography, and was unambiguously confirmed by NMR. Also the compound containing 2 generations of double release monomers and 4 paclitaxel moieties was shown to release all end groups following reduction of the nitro group (figure 23).
Obviously, unbranched self-elimination spacers may be incorporated in between the specifier and the multiple release spacers. This may be beneficial for the enzymatic removal or transformation of the specifier. A branched multiple release moiety directly coupled to the specifier may increase steric crowding around the specifier-spacer bond to be cleaved; additional single release self-elimination spacers may provide a solution here.
Thus, for efficient removal or transformation of the specifier, in some cases it is particularly preferred to incorporate one or more single release self-elimination spacers in between specifier and one or more generation(s) of a multiple release spacer. This means that in compounds of formula
V-(W-)w(X-)xC((A-)aZ)c, V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D((A-)aZ)d)c,
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E((A-)aZ)e)d)c, and
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E(F((A-)aZ)f)e)d)c, w + x > 0.
In addition, single release self-elimination spacers may be added to the highest generation of the multiple release spacer(s) before leaving groups Z. This may be beneficial for enhanced release of Z, depending on the chemical nature of the function with which Z, preferably a drag, is attached to the spacer. Incorporation of single release self-elimination spacers before Z (for example drug moieties) may be beneficial for the stability of the final product. If, for example, a self-elimination ω-amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacer is incorporated in between the single release or multiple release electronic cascade spacer and a leaving group that is connected through its hydroxyl group, the stability of the final product may be increased when used under physiological conditions. Furthermore, when only aniline-based multiple release spacers are used, addition of single release phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers to a generation of multiple release spacers or, preferably, to the highest generation of multiple release spacer(s) before leaving groups Z enables the release of two or more leaving groups Z that are coupled with their aliphatic amino group to the multiple release spacer system.
When only aniline-based multiple release spacers are used and no single release phenol- or thiophenol-based spacers are incorporated into the multiple release spacer system to which leaving groups Z are coupled with their aliphatic amino group only 1 Z group will be released.
In yet another aspect the invention relates to the use of any of the compounds defined above for the manufacture of a pharmaceutical preparation for the treatment of a mammal being in need thereof. The invention also relates to methods of treating a mammal being in need thereof, whereby the method comprises the admimsfration of a pharmaceutical composition to the mammal in a therapeutically effective dose.
In a further aspect the invention relates to a process for preparing a pharmaceutical composition containing a compound as defined above, to provide a solid or a liquid formulation for administration orally, topically or by injection. Such a process at least comprises the step of mixing the compound with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
The invention also relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising the compounds of the invention as defined above. The compounds of the invention may be administered in purified form together with a pharmaceutical carrier as a pharmaceutical composition. The preferred form depends on the intended mode of administration and therapeutic or diagnostic application. The pharmaceutical carrier can be any compatible, nontoxic substance suitable to deliver the compounds of the invention to the patient. Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers are well known in the art and include, for example, aqueous solutions such as (sterile) water or physiologically buffered saline or other solvents or vehicles such as glycols, glycerol, oils such as olive oil or injectable organic esters, alcohol, fats, waxes, and inert solids may be used as the carrier. A pharmaceutically acceptable carrier may further contain physiologically acceptable compounds that act, e.g. to stabilize or to increase the absorption of the compounds of the invention. Such physiologically acceptable compounds include, for example, carbohydrates, such as glucose, sucrose or dextrans, antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid or glutathione, chelating agents, low molecular weight proteins or other stabilizers or excipients. One skilled in the art would know that the choice of a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, including a physiologically acceptable compound, depends, for example, on the route of administration of the composition. Pharmaceutically acceptable adjuvants, buffering agents, dispersing agents, and the like, may also be incorporated into the pharmaceutical compositions.
For oral administration, the active ingredient can be administered in solid dosage forms, such as capsules, tablets, and powders, or in liquid dosage forms, such as elixirs, syraps, and suspensions. Active component(s) can be encapsulated in gelatin capsules together with inactive ingredients and powdered carriers, such as glucose, lactose, sucrose, mannitol, starch, cellulose or cellulose derivatives, magnesium stearate, stearic acid, sodium saccharin, talcum, magnesium carbonate and the like. Examples of additional inactive ingredients that may be added to provide desirable color, taste, stability, buffering capacity, dispersion or other known desirable features are red iron oxide, silica gel, sodium lauryl sulfate, titanium dioxide, edible white ink and the like. Similar diluents can be used to make compressed tablets. Both tablets and capsules can be manufactured as sustained release products to provide for continuous release of medication over a period of hours. Compressed tablets can be sugar coated or film coated to mask any unpleasant taste and protect the tablet from the atmosphere, or enteric-coated for selective disintegration in the gastrointestinal tract. Liquid dosage forms for oral administration can contain coloring and flavoring to increase patient acceptance.
The compounds of the invention are however preferably administered parenterally. Preparations of the compounds of the invention for parenteral administration must be sterile. Sterilization is readily accomplished by filtration through sterile filtration membranes, optionally prior to or following lyophilization and reconstitution. The parenteral route for administration of compounds of the invention is in accord with known methods, e.g. injection or infusion by intravenous, intraperitoneal, intramuscular, intraarterial, or intralesional routes. The compounds of the mvention may be admimstered continuously by infusion or by bolus injection. A typical composition for intravenous infusion could be made up to contain 100 to 500 ml of sterile 0.9% NaCl or 5% glucose optionally supplemented with a 20% albumin solution and 1 mg to 10 g of the compound of the invention, depending on the particular type of compound of the invention and its required dosing regime. Methods for preparing parenterally administrable compositions are well known in the art and described in more detail in various sources, including, for example, Remington's Pharmaceutical Science35.
The invention also relates to compounds as defined above, wherein the specifier V is removed or transformed by an enzyme that is transported to the vicinity of or inside target cells or target tissue via antibody-directed enzyme prodrag therapy (ADEPT)1, polymer-directed enzyme prodrug therapy (PDEPT) or macromolecular-directed enzyme prodrag therapy (MDEPT)2, viras-directed enzyme prodrag therapy (NDEPT)3 or gene-directed enzyme prodrag therapy (GDEPT) .
The invention is further exemplified by the following Examples. These examples are for illustrative purposes and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention.
EXAMPLES
Example 1 Activation of nitrotriol 11 to give triply activated 12 (see fig. 9). 100 mg (0.47 mmol) of nitrotriol 11 was dissolved in 6 mL of dry THF under an argon atmosphere. The solution was added dropwise to a solution of 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate (1.42 g, 15 equiv) and pyridine (569 μL, 15 equiv) in 5 mL dry THF. The reaction mixture was stirred for 1 h, dichloromethane was added, and the organic layer was washed with 10% citric acid and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and evaporated to dryness. The product was purified by means of column chromatography (EtOAc/heptane 3/5) to afford 139 mg (42%) of triply activated 12. 1H-ΝMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 5.41 (s, 2H, CH2), 5.47 (s, 4H, CH2), 7.37-7.42 (m, 6H, aromatic), 7.76 (s, 2H, aromatic), 8.26-8.30 (m, 6H, aromatic) ppm; FAB-MS m e 709 (M+H)+, 731 (M+Na)+; Anal. (C30H20Oι7N4) calculated C 50.86%, H 2.85%, N 7.91%, measured C 51.09%, H 3.13%, N 7.54%.
Example 2 Coupling of benzyl alcohol to triply activated 12 to give 13 (see fig. 9). Triply activated 12 (29.5 mg, 0.042 mmol) was dissolved in dry dichloromethane. Benzyl alcohol (13 μL, 3.1 equiv) and DMAP (17 mg, 3.3 equiv) were added and the reaction mixture was stirred for 64 h. Dichloromethane was added and the organic layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, 10% citric acid, and brine, and dried over sodium sulfate. The product was purified by means of column chromatography (EtOAc/heptane 3/5) to afford 15 mg (59%) of desired product 13. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 5.15 - 5.18 (m, 8H, benzylic), 5.27 (s, 4H, benzylic), 7.33 - 7.39 (m, 15H, aromatic benzyl alcohol), 7.52 (s, 2H, aromatic spacer) ppm.
Example 3
Coupling of phenethyl alcohol to triply activated 12 to give 14 (see fig. 9). Triply activated 12 (27 mg, 0.038 mmol) was dissolved in dry dichloromethane and the solution was cooled to 0 °C. Phenethyl alcohol (16 μL, 3.5 equiv) and DMAP (16 mg, 3.5 equiv) were added and the reaction mixture was allowed to reach Rt and was stirred for 40 h. Dichloromethane was added and the organic layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, 10% citric acid, and brine, and dried over sodium sulfate. The product was purified by means of column chromatography (EtOAc/heptane 1/1) to afford 14 mg (57%) of desired product 14. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, DMSO- D6/CDCl3/CD3OD) δ 2.91 (m, 6H, CH2CH2Ph), 4.30 (m, 6H, CH2CH2Ph), 5.18 (m, 6H, OCH2Ph), 7.14-7.28 (m, 15H, aromatic), 7.58 (s, 2H, aromatic) 'ppm; ESI-MS m/e 680 (M + Na)+.
Example 4 Coupling of benzylamine to triply activated 12 to give 15 (see fig. 10). To a solution of 12 (523 mg, 0.738 mmol) in dichloromethane were added benzylamine (403 μL, 3.69 mmol) and Et3N (514 μL, 3.69 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 4 h. Dichlorormethane was added and the resulting mixture was washed with 10% citric acid, saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure. Column chromatography (CH2Cl2/MeOH 25/1) gave 15 (406 mg, 90%) as a solid. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 4.31 - 4.36 (m, 6H, benzylic benzylamine), 5.13 (s, 2H, benzylic spacer), 5.20 (s, 4H, benzylic spacer), 7.23 - 7.34 (m, 17 H, aromatic) ppm.
Example 5 Protection of aminotriol 16 to give allyl iV-[2,4,6-tri(hydroxymethyl)phenyl] carbamate 17 (see fig. 11). To a solution of 1.085 g of 16 (5.92 mmol) in 20 mL dry THF under an argon atmosphere were added 1.48 mL (Aloc)2O (1.5 equiv) and 200 mg HOBt (0.25 equiv). The reaction mixture was stirred for 72 hours at room temperature. THF was evaporated and the product was purified by means of column chromatography (CH2Cl2/MeOH 6/1) which afforded 872 mg (55%) of the desired compound 17. Mp 87 °C; 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDCL3/CD3OD) δ 4.58-4.66 (m, 8H, 3 x CH2 and 2 Aloe), 5.25-5.41 (m, 2H, Aloe), 5.86-6.11 (m, IH, Aloe), 7.35 (s, 2H, aromatic) ppm; MS (El) m/e 249 (M - H2O)+; Anal. (Cι3Hι7NO5-7/8H2O) calculated C 55.17%, H 6.68%, N 4.95%, measured C 55.16%, H 6.16%, N 4.81%.
Example 6 Activation of triol 17 to give triply activated tricarbonate 18 (see fig. 11). A solution of 837 mg of triol 17 (3.13 mmol) in dry THF was added drop wise under an argon atmosphere to a solution of 9.47 g 4-nitrophenyl chloroformate (15 equiv) and 3.8 mL pyridine (15 equiv) in dry THF. The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 hours and THF was evaporated. CH2C12 was added and the organic layer was washed with 10% aqueous citric acid and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous Na2SO4 and evaporated. The product was purified by means of column chromatography (EtOAc/heptane 2/5) to afford 1.546 g (65%) of tricarbonate 18. Mp 46 °C; 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDCL3) δ 4.68 (d, 2H, J = 5.7 Hz, Aloe), 5.22-5.37 (m, 8H, 3 x CH2 and 2 Aloe), 5.89-6.07 (m, IH, Aloe), 7.35-7.42 (m, 6H, aromatic), 7.67 (s, 2H, aromatic), 8.26-8.30 (m, 6H, aromatic) ppm; MS (El) m/e 763 (M + H)+, 785 (M + Na)+; Anal. (C34H26N4Oι7-3H2O) calculated C 50.00%, H 3.95%, N 6.86%, measured C 49.99%, H 3.33%, N 6.44%. Example 7 Coupling of propylamine to triply activated 18 to give triscarbamate 19 (see fig. 11). To a solution of 18 (313 mg, 0.410 mmol) in dichloromethane were added propylamine (169 μL, 2.05 mmol) and Et3N (286 μL, 2.05 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. Dichloromethane was added and the resulting mixture was washed with 10% citric acid, saturated sodium bicarbonate and brine, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure. Column chromatography (CH2Cl2/MeOH 20/1) gave 19 (158 mg, 74%) as a solid. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 0.87 - 0.94 (m, 9H, Me), 1.43 - 1.56 (m, 6H, CH2CH2CH3), 3.07 - 3.15 (m, 6H, CH2CH2CH3), 4.63 (d, 2H, Aloe), 5.01 - 5.17 (m, 8H, 2H Aloe and 6H O- CH2), 5.95 (m, IH, Aloe), 7.32 (bs, 2H, aromatic) ppm.
Example 8 Activation of nitrodiol 20 to give doubly activated 21 (see fig. 12). Nitrodiol 20 (130 mg, 0.621 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of dry THF under an argon atmosphere and the solution was cooled to 0 °C. Diisopropylethylamine (DIPEA) (865 μL, 8 equiv), 4- nitrophenyl chloroformate (751 mg, 6 equiv), and pyridine (25 μL, 0.5 equiv) were added to the solution. The reaction mixture was allowed to reach room temperature (Rt) and stirred for 16 h. Dichloromethane was added and the organic layer was washed with water, saturated sodium bicarbonate, and water. The organic layer was dried over
' anhydrous sodium sulfate and evaporated to dryness. The product was purified by means of column chromatography (EtOAc/heptane 2/5) to afford 280 mg (84%) of doubly activated 21. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 5.04 (s, 2H, CH2), 5.08 (s, 2H,
CH2), 7.12 (s, IH, vinylic), 7.38 (d, 2H, J = 3.9 Hz, aromatic), 7.41 (d, 2H, J = 3.9 Hz, aromatic), 7.51 (d, 2H, J = 8.3 Hz, aromatic), 8.25-8.30 (m, 6H, aromatic) ppm; Anal. (C24Hι7N3Oι2) calculated C 53.44%, H 3.18%, N 7.79%, measured C 53.68%, H 3.44%, N 7.31%.
Example 9 Coupling of paclitaxel to doubly activated 21 to give 22 (see fig. 12). Doubly activated 21 (40 mg, 0.075 mmol) was dissolved in 1 mL of dry dichloromethane and the solution was cooled to 0 °C. Paclitaxel (128 mg, 2 equiv) and 4-
(dimethylamino)pyridine (DMAP) (20 mg, 2.2 equiv) were added and the reaction mixture was allowed to reach Rt and was stirred for 16 h. Dichloromethane was added and the organic layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, 0.5 N potassium bisulfate, and brine, and dried over sodium sulfate. The product was purified by means of column chromatography (EtOAc) to afford 118 mg (80%) of desired product 22. 1H- NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.14 (s, 6H, 17), 1.26 (s, 6H, 16), 1.68 (s, 6H, 19), 1.91 (bs, 6H, 18), 2.21 (s, 3H, 10-acetyl), 2.22 (s, 3H, 10-acetyl), 2.46 (s, 6H, 4-acetyl), 3.80 (bd, 2H, 3), 4.19 (d, 2H, 20b), 4.31 (d, 2H, 20a), 4.43 (m, 2H, 7), 4.76 (dd, 2H, CH2- cinna yl), 4.85 (s, 2H, CH2-cinnamyl), 4.95 (d, 2H, 5), 5.46 (d, IH, J = 3.0 Hz, 2'), 5.49 (d, IH, J = 3.1 Hz, 2% 5.68 (d, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz, 2), 6.05 (m, 2H, 3'), 6.20-6.35 (m, 4H, 10 and 13), 6.92 (s, IH, vinylic cinnamyl), 7.30-7.65 (m, 24H, aromatic), 7.71 (m, 4H, aromatic N-Bz), 8.12-8.16 (m, 6H, aromatic, 4H 2-Bz and 2H cinnamyl) ppm; ESI- MS m/e 1993 (M + Na)+; Anal. (Cι06Hι09N3O34) calculated C 64.66%, H 5.58%, N 2.13%, measured C 65.02%, H 6.07%, N 1.72%.
Example 10
Coupling of aminodiol 23 to doubly activated 21 to give tetraol 24 (see fig. 13).
Doubly activated 21 (154 mg, 0.285 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of dry dimethylformamide (DMF) and aminodiol 23 (113 mg, 2.2 equiv), DIPEA (99 μL, 2 equiv), and a catalytic amount of hydroxybenzotriazole monohydrate (HOBt) (15 mg, 0.39 equiv) were added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 16 h. HOBt (8 mg, 0.2 equiv) was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for another 64 h. 10% 2- propanol in EtOAc was added and the organic layer was washed with water and dried over sodium sulfate. The crade product was purified by means of column chromatography (dichloromethane/MeOH 6/1) to yield tetraol 24 (72 mg, 41%). 1H- NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3/CD3OD) δ 4.31 (m, 8H, CH2OH), 4.91 (s, 2H, CH2OCO), 4.95 (s, 2H, CH2OCO), 6.62 (s, 2H, vinylic), 6.98 (s, IH, vinylic), 7.24 (d, 2H, J = 8.6 Hz, aromatic), 7.24 (d, 2H, J = 8.6 Hz, aromatic), 7.40 (m, 4H, aromatic), 7.56 (d, 2H, J = 8.5 Hz, aromatic), 8.26 (d, 2H, J = 8.8 Hz, aromatic) ppm; FAB-MS m/e 643 (M + Na)+; Anal. (C32H33N3Oι0) calculated C 62.03%, H 5.37%, N 6.78%, measured C 62.62%, H 5.71%, N 6.18%.
Example 11 Activation of tetraol 24 to give quadruply activated 25 (see fig. 13). Tetraol 24 (58 mg, 0.094 mmol) was dissolved in dry THF and the solution was cooled to 0 °C. DIPEA (261 μL, 16 equiv), 4-mtrophenyl chloroformate (226 mg, 12 equiv), and pyridine (8 μL, 1 equiv) were added to the solution. The reaction mixture was allowed to reach Rt and was stirred for 16 h. Dry dichloromethane was added and the reaction mixture was stirred for another 24 h. Dichloromethane was added and the organic layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, 10% citric acid, and brine. The organic layer was dried over anhydrous sodium sulfate and evaporated to dryness. The product was purified by means of column chromatography (EtOAc/heptane 5/4) to afford 65 mg (54%) of quadruply activated 25. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 4.93 (s, 2H, CH2OCONH), 4.95 (s, 2H, CH2OCONH), 5.03 (s, 4H, CH2OCOO), 5.07 (s, 4H, CH2OCOO), 6.80-7.02 (m, 3H, vinylic), 7.28-7.50 (m, 18H, aromatic), 8.23-8.29 (m, 10H, aromatic) ppm; ESI-MS m/e 1302 (M + Na)+; Anal. (C60H45N7O26) calculated C 56.30%, H 3.54%, N 7.66%, measured C 56.58%, H 3.74%, N 7.37%.
Example 12 Coupling of paclitaxel to quadruply activated 25 to give 26 (see fig. 13). Quadraply activated 25 (13 mg, 0.010 mmol) was dissolved in 1 mL of dry dichloromethane and the solution was cooled to 0 °C. Paclitaxel (35 mg, 4 equiv) and DMAP (5.5 mg, 4.4 equiv) were added and the reaction mixture was allowed to reach Rt and was stirred for 16 h. Dichloromethane was added and the organic layer was washed with saturated sodium bicarbonate, 0.5 N potassium bisulfate, and brine, and dried over sodium sulfate. The product was purified by means of column chromatography (EtOAc) to afford 27 mg (64%) of desired product 26. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 1.15 (m, 12H, 17), 1.26 (m, 12H, 16), 1.68 (bs, 12H, 19), 1.89 (m, 12H, 18), 2.17 (m, 12H, 10- acetyl), 2.42 (m, 12H, 4-acetyl), 3.80 (m, 4H, 3), 4.20 (m, 4H, 20b), 4.29 (m, 4H, 20a), 4.40 (m, 4H, 7), 4.75-5.00 (m, 16H, 4H 5 and 12H CH2-cinnamyl), 5.47 (m, 4H, 2'), 5.65 (m, 4H, 2), 5.97 (m, 4H, 3*), 6.13-6.38 (m, 8H, 10 and 13), 6.76-6.91 (m, 3H, vinylic cinnamyl), 7.23-7.65 (m, H, aromatic), 7.71 (d, 8H, aromatic N-Bz), 8.13 (m, 8H, aromatic 2-Bz), 8.23 (d, 2H, aromatic cinnamyl) ppm; ESI-MS m/e 4157 (M + H2O)+.
Example 13 Coupling of benzylamine to doubly activated 21 to give 27 (see fig. 14). To a solution of 21 (50 mg, 92.7 μmol) in dichloromethane (2 mL) were added benzylamine (51 μL, 0.464 mmol) and Et3N (65 μL, 0.464 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 16 h. Dichloromethane was added and the resulting mixture was washed with 10% citric acid, saturated bicarbonate and brine, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, and concentrated under reduced pressure. Column chromatography (CH2Cl2/MeOH 40/1) gave 27 (38 mg, 79.9 μmol, 86%) as a solid. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 4.33 - 4.39 (m, 4H, benzylic), 4.79 (s, 2H, spacer), 4.82 (s, 2H, spacer), 6.78 (s, IH, alkene), 7.25 - 7.35 (m, 12H, aromatic), 7.42 (d, 2H, aromatic spacer), 8.18 (d, 2H, aromatic spacer) ppm.
Example 14 Coupling of p-aminobenzyl alcohol to doubly activated 21 to give 28 (see fig. 15). Compound 21 (330 mg, 0.612 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (5 mL) and p- aminobenzyl alcohol (166 mg, 1.35 mmol), DIPEA (214 μL, 1.22 mmol), and 1- hydroxybenzotriazole (24.8 mg, 0.184 mmol) were added at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 days. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and then dissolved in ethyl acetate (75 mL). The clear solution was washed with a 10% aqueous citric acid solution and brine, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. Column chromatography (chlorofoπn/MeOH 8/1) afforded 28 (181 mg, 0.357 mmol, 58%) as a white solid after freeze-drying. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD/CDCl3) δ 4.57 (s, 4H, CH2OH), 4.89 (s, 2H, CH2OC(O)R), 4.92 (s, 2Η, CH2OC(O)R), 6.95 (s, 1Η, CH=CR2), 7.25 - 7.54 (m, 10Η, aromatic), 8.24 (d, 2Η, J = 8.8 Hz, aromatic) ppm; ESI-MS m/e 530 (M + Na)+; Anal. (C26H25N3O8) calculated C 61.53%, H 4.97%, N 8.28%, measured C 61.60%, H 5.20%, N 7.61%.
Example 15 Activation of diol 28 with p-nitrophenyl chloroformate to give 29 (see fig. 15). To a solution of compound 28 (160 mg, 0.315 mmol) in THF (5 mL) were added DIPEA (440 μL, 2.52 mmol), p-nitrophenyl chloroformate (381 mg, 1.89 mmol), and pyridine (12.9 μL, 0.158 mmol) at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was slowly warmed to room temperature and stirred overnight. Ethyl acetate (75 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and the mixture was washed with a saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate solution, a 10% aqueous citric acid solution, and brine. The organic fraction was dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. Column chromatography (EtOAc/hexanes 1/1) afforded 29 (155 mg, 0.187 mmol, 59%) as a white solid after freeze-drying. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3/DMSO-D6) δ 4.90 (s, 2H, CH2OC(O)NHR), 4.95 (s, 2H, CH2OC(O)NHR), 5.23 (s, 4H, CH2OC(O)OR), 6.96 (s, 1Η, CH=CR2), 7.34 - 7.56 (m, 14Η, aromatic), 8.22 - 8.28 (m, 6H, aromatic) ppm; ESI-MS m/e 860 (M + Na)+, 1697 (2M + Na)+; Anal. (C40H3ιN5Oι6-1.5H2O) calculated C 55.56%, H 3.96%, N 8.10%, measured C 55.60%, H 3.96%, N 8.30%.
Example 16 Coupling of p-methoxybenzylamine to doubly activated 29 to give 30 (see fig. 16). To a solution of 29 (50 mg, 59.7 μmol) in l-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone (4 mL) were added at 0 °C p-methoxybenzylamine (31 μL, 0.24 mmol) and DIPEA (3.0 μL, 18 μmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 h. A 10% solution of isopropanol in ethyl acetate (25 mL) was added and the resulting mixture was washed with water and brine, dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated under reduced pressure. Column chromatography (EtOAc/hexanes 1/3) gave 30 (35.0 mg, 42.0 μmol, 70%) as a white solid. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3/CD3OD) δ 3.79 (s, 6H, OCH3), 4.26 (s, 4H, NCH2), 4.90 (s, 2H, CH2OC(O)NHC6H4R), 4.94 (s, 2H, CH2OC(O)NHC6H4R), 5.04 (s, 4H, CH2OC(O)NCH2R), 6.85 (d, 4H, J = 8.6 Hz, aromatic), 6.96 (s, IH, CH=CR2), 7.19 - 7.28 (m, 8Η, aromatic), 7.37 - 7.42 (m, 4H, aromatic), 7.53 (d, 2H, J = 8.6 Hz, aromatic), 8.25 (m, 2H, aromatic) ppm; FAB-MS m/e 856 [M+Na , 1690 [2M + Na]+.
Example 17 Coupling of p-chlorobenzylamine to doubly activated 29 to give 31 (see fig. 16). To a solution of 29 (72 mg, 86 μmol) in THF (4 mL) were added at 0 °C p- chlorobenzylamine (42 μL, 0.34 mmol) and DIPEA (4.5 μL, 26 μmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was purified by colum chromatography (EtOAc/hexanes 1/1) to afford 31 (60 mg, 71.2 mmol, 83%) as a white solid after freeze-drying. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3/CD3OD) δ 4.27 (s, 4H, NCH2), 4.89 (s, 2H, CH2OC(O)NHC6H4R), 4.94 (s, 2H, CH2OC(O)NHC6H4R), 5.03 (s, 4H, CH2OC(O)NCH2R), 6.98 (s, IH, CH=CR2), 7.21 - 7.29 (m, 12Η, aromatic), 7.40 - 7.44 (m, 4H, aromatic), 7.57 (d, 2H, J = 8.6 Hz, aromatic), 8.25 (m, 2H, aromatic) ppm;
Figure imgf000071_0001
Example 18 Coupling of phenethyl alcohol to doubly activated 29 to give 32 (see fig. 16). To a solution of 29 (18 mg, 21μmol) in THF (2 mL) were added at 0 °C phenethyl alcohol (10.3 μL, 85.9 μmol), DIPEA (1.9 μL, 11 μmol), and DMAP (10.5 mg, 85.9 μmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure and the residue was purified by column chromatography (EtOAc/hexanes 1/1) to afford 32 (9.5 mg, 12 mmol, 55%) as a white solid after freeze-drying. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3/CD3OD) δ 2.97 (t, 4H, J = 7.0 Hz, CH2CH2Ph), 4.34 (t, 4Η, J = 7.0 Hz, CH2CH2Ph), 4.90 (s, 2H, CH2OC(O)NHC6H4R), 4.94 (s, 2H, CH2OC(O)NHC6H4R), 5.07 (s, 4H, CH2OC(O)OR), 6.97 (s, 1Η, CH=CR2), 7.19 - 7.30 (m, 14Η, aromatic), 7.39 - 7.44 (m, 4H, aromatic), 7.54 (d, 2H, J = 8.7 Hz, aromatic), 8.25 (d, 2H, J = 8.7 Hz, aromatic) ppm; FAB-MS m/e 804 [M + H]+, 826 [M + Naf.
Example 19 Coupling of benzylamine to 4-nitrobenzyl chloroformate 33 to give 34 (see fig. 17). A solution of chloroformate 33 (200 mg, 0.923 mmol) in THF was added dropwise to a mixture of benzylamine (101 μL, 0.923 mmol) and Et3N (129 μL, 1 equiv) in THF at 0 °C. The reaction mixture was allowed to reach room temperature and was stirred for 16 h. EtOAc was added and the organic layer was washed with 0.1 M NaOH, 10% citric acid, and brine, and dried over sodium sulfate to quantitatively yield desired product 34. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ 4.39 (d, 2H, J = 6.0 Hz, benzylic benzylamine), 5.22 (s, 2H, benzylic spacer), 7.25 - 7.40 (m, 5H, aromatic benzylamine), 7.50 (d, 2H, J = 8.4 Hz, aromatic spacer), 8.20 (d, 2H, J = 8.4 Hz, aromatic spacer) ppm.
Example 20 Proof of principle for triple elimination. Formation of benzyl alcohol upon reduction of 13 (see fig. 19). Compound 13 was dissolved in 3 mL of MeOH/AcOH/THF (1.5/0.5/1). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt. After 30 min thin layer chromatography indicated disappearance of starting compound and formation of a substantial amount of benzyl alcohol. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo, dioxane was added, and the resulting solution was freeze-dried. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3/CD3OD/CD3CN/DMSO-D6) δ 4.57 (s, 2H, benzylic), 7.28-7.36 (m, 5H, aromatic) ppm, identical with peaks observed for free benzyl alcohol in the same medium.
Example 21 Proof of principle for triple elimination. Formation of phenethyl alcohol upon reduction of 14 (see fig. 19). Compound 14 was dissolved in 3.75 mL of MeOH/AcOH/THF (2/0.75/1). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt. After 1 h thin layer chromatography indicated disappearance of starting compound and formation of a substantial amount of phenethyl alcohol. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo, dioxane was added, and the resulting solution was freeze-dried. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-D6/CD3OD/D2O) δ 2.68 (t, 2H, CH2CH2Ph), 3.58 (t, 2H, CH2CH2Ph), 7.11-7.22 (m, 5H, aromatic) ppm, identical with peaks observed for free phenethyl alcohol in the same medium; ESI-MS m/e 122 (M)+.
Example 22
Reduction of the nitro group in 15. Failure of elimination of benzylamine (see fig. 20). Compound 15 (16 mg) was dissolved in 10 mL of MeOH/AcOH (8/2). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt. After 30 min, thin layer chromatography indicated disappearance of starting compound and showed complete conversion to a single product. Formation of benzylamine was not or was hardly observed. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo, the mixture was freeze-dried. Under a number of varied circumstances (different deuterated solvent combinations, different pH (acidic, neutral, and basic), different buffers), 1H-NMR did hardly show formation of free benzylamine. After 2 days, maximally 33 percent of free benzylamine was observed (1H-NMR). Dissolving the reduced product in DMF did not increase amounts of released benzylamine. Reduction of 15 using Raney Nickel/hydrazine did not lead to different results.
Example 23 Deprotection of the Aloe group from 19. Failure of elimination of propylamine (see fig. 21). Compound 19 (36 mg, 69 μmol) was dissolved in 1 mL of CDC13. Morpholine was added (20 equiv, 120 μL, 1.38 mmol), and argon was bubbled through the solution. Then, a catalytic amount of palladium tetrakistriphenylphosphine was added. Elimination of propylamine was studied by 1H-NMR. After 1 h, thin layer chromatography indicated disappearance of starting compound. Under a number of varied circumstances (different deuterated solvent combinations, different pH (acidic, neutral, and basic), different buffers, in the presence of different nucleophiles), by 1H- NMR it was shown that maximally 33 percent of free propylamine had been formed after 2 weeks.
Example 24 Proof of principle for double elimination. Formation of paclitaxel upon reduction of 22 (see fig. 22). Nifrocinnamyl biscarbonate 22 was dissolved in 3.5 mL of MeOH/AcOH/THF (2/0.5/1). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt. After 30 min thin layer chromatography indicated complete disappearance of starting compound and formation of a substantial amount of paclitaxel. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo, dioxane was added and the resulting solution was freeze-dried. Distinguishing peaks in the 1H-NMR, (300 MHz, CD3OD) δ 4.19 (s, 4H, 20a and 20b), 4.32 (dd, 2H, 7), 4.74 (d, 2H, 2'), 4.99 (dd, 2H, 5), 5.65 (m, 4H, 2 and 3'), 6.16 (t, 2H, 13), 6.45 (s, 2H, 10) ppm, were identical with peaks observed for free paclitaxel in the same medium. The proton NMR spectrum did not show 2'-coupled paclitaxel; only unconjugated paclitaxel was present; FAB-MS m/e 854 (M + H)+, 876
(M + Na)+.
Example 25 Proof of principle for quadruple elimination. Formation of paclitaxel upon reduction of 26 (see fig. 23). Compound 26 was dissolved in 3.25 mL MeOH/AcOH/THF (1.5/0.75/1). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred. After 30 min, thin layer chromatography indicated disappearance of starting compound and formation of a substantial amount of paclitaxel. After 16 h, the mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo, dioxane was added, and the resulting solution was freeze-dried. Distinguishing peaks in the 1H-NMR, (300 MHz, CD3OD/CDCl3/DMSO- D6) δ 4.77 (d, 4H, 2'), 4.98 (d, 4H, 5), 5.65 (m, 8H, 2 and 3'), 6.17 (m, 4H, 13), 6.39 (s, 4H, 10) ppm, were identical with peaks observed for free paclitaxel in the same medium; ESI-MS m/e 877 (M + Na)+.
Example 26 Reduction of the nitro group in 27. Failure of elimination of benzylamine (see fig. 24). To a solution of 27 (18 mg, 38 μmol) in a 4:1 mixture of MeOH and AcOH (7.5 mL) Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt. After 1 h, thin layer chromatography indicated disappearance of starting compound and showed complete conversion to a single product. No formation of benzylamine was observed. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo, dioxane was added and the mixture was freeze-dried. In a number of different deuterated solvent combinations, possessing a different pH, in some cases buffered, in the presence or absence of nucleophiles, 1H-NMR did not show formation of more than 50 percent of free benzylamine, even after a day.
Example 27
Reduction of the nitro group in 30. Failure of elimination of p- methoxybenzylamine (see fig. 25). To a solution of 30 (10 mg, 12 μmol) in a 1:1 mixture of THF and methanol (2 mL) were added Raney Nickel (50% slurry in water, 0.05 mL) and hydrazine monohydrate (1.0 μL, 21 μmol). Thin layer chromatography (EtOAc/heptanes 3/1) showed complete conversion to a single product witliin 20 minutes. The reaction mixture was stirred overnight at room temperature. No formation of p-methoxybenzylamine was observed after night. The reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in a 1 : 1 mixture of DMSO-d6 and D2O. 1H-NMR did not show any formation of free p- methoxybenzylamine after 1, 5, or 20 days. Slow decomposition of reduced 30 not involving release of p-methoxybenzylamine was observed.
Example 28
Reduction of the nitro group in 31. Failure of elimination of p-chlorobenzylamine (see fig. 25). To a solution of 31 (10 mg, 12 μmol) in a 1:1 mixture of THF and methanol (2 mL) were added Raney Nickel (50% slurry in water, 0.05 mL) and hydrazine monohydrate (0.6 μL, 12 μmol). Thin layer cohromatography (EtOAc/heptanes 3/1) showed complete conversion to a single product within 30 minutes. The reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in a 1:1 mixture of CDC13 and CD3OD. 1H-NMR did not show any formation of free p-methoxybenzylamine after 2 h, 15 h, 2 days, or 5 days. Slow decomposition of reduced 31 not involving release of p-chlorobenzylamine was observed.
Example 29 Reduction of the nitro group in 32. Formation of phenethyl alcohol (see fig. 26). To a solution of 32 (8.0 mg, 10 μmol) in a 1:1 mixture of THF and methanol (1.5 mL) were added Raney Nickel (50% slurry in water, 0.05 mL) and hydrazine monohydrate (0.5 μL, 10 μmol). After 20 minutes, hydrazine monohydrate (0.5 μL, 10 μmol) were added. Thin layer chromatography (EtOAc/heptanes 1/1) showed complete conversion to a single product after 1 h. The reaction mixture was filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The residue was dissolved in a 1 : 1 mixture of CDC13 and CD3OD to which 10 drops of DMSO-d6 were added. 1H-NMR showed complete release of free phenethyl alcohol. Distinguishing peaks in the 1H-NMR spectrum, (300 MHz, CD3OD/CDCl3/DMSO-D6) δ 2.83 (t, 2H, J = 7.1 Hz, CH2CH2Ph) and 3.76 (t, 2Η, J = 7.1 Hz, CH2CH2Ph) ppm, were identical with peaks observed for phenethyl alcohol in the same medium.
Example 30 Proof of principle for single elimination. Formation of benzylamine upon reduction of 34 (see fig. 27). Compound 34 (40 mg) was dissolved in 3.75 mL of MeOH/AcOH/THF (2/0.75/1). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt. After 100 min, thin layer chromatography indicated disappearance of starting compound and formation of a substantial amount of benzylamine. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CD3OD/CDCl3/DMSO-D6) δ 3.98 (s, 2H, benzylic, liberated benzylamine), 7.34 - 7.43 (m, 5H, aromatic, liberated benzylamine) ppm, identical with peaks observed for free benzylamine in the same medium, indicated complete release of free benzylamine. NMR signals from conjugated benzylamine have disappeared.
Example 31 Stability of 35. Treatment of 35 with Zinc (see fig. 28). Dibenzyl carbonate 35 (13 mg) was dissolved in 2.5 mL MeOH/THF/AcOH (1.5/0.5/0.5). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt for 16 h. Thin layer chromatography indicated no formation of new compounds, and indicated stability of 35. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. 1H-NMR (300 MHz, CDCl3/CD3OD/DMSO-D6) δ 5.07 (s, 4H, benzylic), 7.27 (m, 10H, aromatic) ppm, showed that the product was identical to starting compound; no benzyl alcohol was observed.
Example 32 Stability of 36. Treatment of 36 with Zinc (see fig. 28). Paclitaxel-2' -carbonate 36 (3 mg) was dissolved in 2.5 mL MeOH/THF/AcOH (1.5/0.5/0.5). Zinc powder was added and the reaction mixture was stirred at Rt for 16 h. Thin layer chromatography indicated no formation of new compounds, and indicated stability of 36. The mixture was filtered over hyflo and the residue was washed with MeOH/dichloromethane. The filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. Distinguishing peaks in the 1H-NMR spectrum, (300 MHz, CDCl3/CD3OD/DMSO-D6) δ 4.81 (d, 2H, J = 7.2 Hz, CH2 cinnamyl), 5.38 (d, IH, J = 8.7 Hz, 2') ppm, showed that the product was identical to starting compound; no cinnamyl alcohol or free paclitaxel was observed.
Example 33
Cytotoxicity of multiple release spacers 16 and 23. The anti-proliferative effect of the monomeric spacers was determined in vitro applying seven well-characterised human tumor cell lines and the microculture sulphorhodamine B (SRB) test. The anti- proliferative effects were determined and expressed as ID50 values (ng/mL), which are the (pro)drug concentrations that gave 50% inhibition of cell growth when compared to control cell growth after 5 days of incubation.
Triple release monomer 16: cell lines (ID50 values in ng/mL): MCF-7; breast cancer (>62.500). EVSA-T; breast cancer (>62.500). WIDR; colon cancer (>62.500). IGROV; ovarian cancer (>62.500). M19; melanoma (>62.500). A498; renal cancer (55867). H226; non-small cell lung cancer (>62.500).
Double release monomer 23: cell lines (ID5o values in ng/mL): MCF-7; breast cancer (>62.500). EVSA-T; breast cancer (>62.500). WTDR; colon cancer (>62.500). IGROV; ovarian cancer (>62.500). M19; melanoma (>62.500). A498; renal cancer (56.784). H226; non-small cell lung cancer (42.406).
REFERENCES
1 Bagshawe, K.D. Drug Dev. Res. 1995, 34, 220.
2 Melton, R. ; Connors, T. ; Knox, R. J. S. T.P. Pharma Sciences, 1999, 13.
3 Huber, B.E.; Richards, C.A.; Krentisky, T.A. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 1991, , 88, 8039.
4 Bagshawe, K.D.; Springer, C.J.; Searle, F.; Antoniw, P.; Sharma, S.K.; Melton, R.G.; Sherwood, R.F. Br. J. Cancer, 1988, 58, 700.
5 King, H.D.; Yurgaitis, D.; Willner, D.; Firestone, R.A.; Yang, M.B.; Lasch, S.J.; Hellstrδm, K.E.; Trail, P.A. Bioconjug. Chem., 1999, 10, 279-288.
6 a) Kovar, M.; Strohalm, J.; Etrych, T.; Ulbrich, K.; Rihova, B. Bioconjug. Chem., 2002, 13, 206-215. b) Wang, D.; Kopeckova, P.; Minko, T.; Nanayakkara, V.; Kopecek, J. Biomacromol, 2000, 1, 313-319.
7 Choe, Y.H.; Conover, CD.; Wu, D.; Royzen, M.; Gervacio, Y.; Borowski, V.; Mehlig, M.; Greenwald, R.B. J. Contr. Rel, 2002, 79, 55-70. Ulbrich, K.; Pechar, M.; Strohalm, J.; Subr, V.; Rihova, B. Macromol. Symp., 1997, 118, 577-585. a) Sun, C; Wirsching, P.; Janda, K.M. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 2002, 12, 2213-2215. b) Dubowchik, G.M.; Radia, S.; Mastalerz, H.; Walker, M.A.; Firestone, R.A.; King, H.D.; Hofstead, S.J.; Willner, D.; Lasch, ST.; Trail, P.A. Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 2002, 12, 1529-1532. Greenwald, R. B.; Yang, K.; Zhao, H; Conover C. D.; Lee, S.; Filpula, D. Bioconjugate Chem. 2003, 14, 395 - 403 Toki, B.E.; Cerveny, C.G.; Wahl, A.F.; Senter, P.D. J. Org. Chem., 2002, 67, 1866-1872 a) Tomalia, D.A.; Naylor, A.M.; Goddard III, W.A. Angew. Chem., Int. Ed. Engl, 1990, 29, 138-175. b) Newkome, G.R.; Nyak, A.; Behera, R.K.; Moorefield, C.N.; Baker, G.R. J. Org. Chem., 1992, 57, 358-362. a) Twyman, L.J.; Beezer, A.E.; Esfand, R.; Hardy, M.J.; Mitchell, J.C. Tet. Lett., 1999, 40, 1743-1746. b) Service, RF. Science, 1995, 267, 458-459. c) Malik, N.; Wiwattanapatapee, R.; Klopsch, R; Lorenz, K.; Frey, H.; Weener, J.W.; Meijer, E.W.; Paulus, W.; Duncan, R. J. Contr. Rel, 2000, 65, 133-148. d) Liu, M.; Frechet, J.M.J. Pharm. Science Techn. Today, 1999, 2, 393-401. e) Esfand, R.; Tomalia, D.A. Drug Discovery Today, 2001, 6, 427-436. f) Stiriba, S.-E.; Frey, H.; Haag, R. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed., 2002, 41, 1329-1334. a) Dire, H.R.; Padilla de Jesus, O.L.; Szoka, Jr., F.C.; Frechet, J.M.J. Bioconjug. Chem., 2002, 13, 443-452. b) Padilla de Jesus, O.L.; Ihre, H.R.; Gagne, L.; Frechet, J.M.J.; Szoka, Jr., F.C. Bioconjug. Chem., 2002, 13, 453-461. Sideratou, Z.; Tsiourvas, D.; Paleos, CM. Langmuir, 2000, 16, 1766-1769. a) Battah, S.H.; Chee, C.-E.; Nakanishi, H.; Gerscher, S.; MacRobert, A.J.; Edwards, C Bioconjug. Chem., 2001, 12, 980-988. b) Smet, M.; Liao, L.-X.; Dehaen, W.; McGrath, D.V. Org. Lett., 2000, 2, 511-513. Seebach, D.; Herrmann, G.F.; Lengweiler, U.D.; Bachmann, B.M.; Amrein, W. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl, 1996, 35, 2795-2797. Gδller, R.; Nors, J.-P.; Caminade A.-M.; Majoral, J.-P. Tet. Lett., 2001, 42, 3587-3590. Krause, W.; Hackmann-Schlichter, N.; Maier, F.K.; Mϋller, R. Top. Curr. Chem., 2000, 210, 261-308. a) Dubowchik, G.M.; Walker, M.A. Pharmacol. Ther., 1999, 83, 67-123. b) Huang, P.S.; Oliff, A. Curr. Opin. Gen. Dev., 2001, 11, 104-110. a) de Groot, F.M.H.; Damen, E.W.P.; Scheeren, H.W. Cwrr. Med. Chem., 2001, 8, 1093-1122. b) Damen, E.W.P.; de Groot, F.M.H.; Scheeren, H.W. Exp. Opin. Ther. Patents 2001, 11, 651-666. a) Houba, P.H.J.; Boven, E.; van der Meulen-Muileman, LH.; Leenders, R.G.G.; Scheeren, J.W.; Pinedo, H.M.; Haisma, H.J. Rr. J. Cancer 2000, 84, 1-8. b) Houba, P.H.J. ; Boven, E.; van der Meulen-Muileman, I.H.; Leenders, R.G.G.; Scheeren, J.W.; Pinedo, H.M.; Haisma, H.J. Int. J. Cancer 2001, 91, 550-554. c) Florent, J.-C; Dong, X.; Gaudel, G.; Mitaku, S.; Monneret, C; Gesson, J.-P.; Jacquesy, J.-C; Mondon, M.; Renoux, B.; Andrianomenjanahary, S.; Michel, S.; Koch, M.; Tillequin, F.; Gerken, M.; Czech, J.; Straub, R.; Bosslet, K. J. Med. Chem. 1998, 41, 3572-3581. d) Khan, S.R.; Denmeade, S.R. Prostate 2000, 45, 80-83. e) Defeo-Jones, D.; Garsky, V.M.; Wong, B.K.; Feng, D.-M.; Bolyar, T.; Haskell, K.; Kiefer, D.M.; Leander, K.; McAvoy, E.; Luinina, P.; Wai, J.; Senderak, E.T.; Motzel, S.L.; Keenan, K.; Van Zwieten, M.; Lin, J.H.; Freidinger, R; Huff, J.; Oliff, A.; Jones, R.E. Nature Med. 2000, 6, 1248-1252. f) de Groot, F.M.H.; de Bart, A.C.W.; Verheijen, J.H.; Scheeren, H.W. J. Med. Chem., 1999, 42, 5277-5283. Ringsdorf, H. J. Polym. Sci., Polym. Symp., 1975, 51, 135-153. Maeda, H.; Matsumura, Y. Crit. Rev. Ther. Drug Carrier Systems, 1989, 6, 193- 210. a) Duncan, R.; Gac-Breton, S.; Keane, R; Musila, R.; Sat, Y.N.; Satchi, R.; Searle, F. J. Contr. Rel, 2001, 74, 135-146. b) Vasey, P.A.; Kaye, S.B.; Morrison, R.; Twelves, C; Wilson, P.; Duncan , R.; Thomson, A.H.; Murray, L.S.; Hilditch, T.E.; Murray, T.; Burtles, S.; Fraier, D.; Frigerio, E.; Cassidy, J. Clin. Cancer Res., 1999, 5, 83-94. a) Greenwald, R.B. J. Contr. Rel, 2001, 74, 159-171. b) Greenwald, R.B.; Conover, CD.; Choe, Y.H. Crit. Rev. Ther. Drug Carrier Systems, 2000, 17, 101-161. Seymour, L.W. Crit. Rev. Tlier. Drug Carrier Systems, 1992, 9, 135-187. a) van Hest, J.C.M.; Delnoye, D.A.P.; Baars, M.W.P.L.; van Genderen, M.H.P.; Meijer, E.W. Science, 1995, 268, 1592-1595. b) Zimmerman, S.C; Zeng, F.; Reichert, D.E.C.; Kolotuchin, S.V. Science, 1996, 271, 1095-1098. de Groot, F.M.H.; Loos, W.J.; Koekkoek, R; van Berkom, L.W.A.; Busscher, G.F.; Seelen, A.E.; Albrecht, C; de Braijn, P.; Scheeren. H.W. J. Org. Chem., 2001, 66, 8815-8830. a) Carl, P.L.; Chakravarty, P.K.; Katzenellenbogen, J.A. J. Med. Chem., 1981, 24, 479-480. b) Wakselman, M. New J. Chem., 1983, 7, 439-447. a) Quilico, A.; Cardani, C; Gazzetta Chimica Italiana, 1953, 83, 155-178. b) Quilico, A.; Cardani, C; Piozzi, F. Gazzetta Chimica Italiana, 1953, 83, 179- 191. c) Piozzi, F. Gazzetta Chimica Italiana, 1953, 83, 673-676. Vanelle, P.; Maldonado, J.; Crozet, M.P.; Senouki, K.; Delmas, F.; Gasquet, M.; Timon-David, P. Eur. J. Med. Chem., 1991, 26, 709-714. De Groot, F.M.H.; Albrecht, C; Koekkoek, R.; Beusker, P.H.; Scheeren, H.W. Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. 2003, 42, 4490-4494. de Groot, F.M.H.; van Berkom, L.W.A.; Scheeren, H.W. J. Med. Chem., 2000, 43, 3093-3102. Remington's Pharmaceutical Science (15th ed., Mack Publishing, Easton, PA, 1980) (incorporated by reference in its entirety for all purposes)

Claims

1 A compound comprising a specifier (V) linked to two or more of the same or different leaving groups (Z) via a self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system, which compound upon a single activation step releases at least two leaving groups, said activation step being the removal or transformation of the specifier.
2 A compound according to claim 1 comprising two or more self-eliminating multiple release spacers.
3 A compound according to claim 1 or 2 comprising a self-eliminating multiple release spacer system incorporating two or more generations of self-eliminating multiple release spacers in the form of a dendritic stracture.
4 A compound according to claim 1, 2 or 3 having a formula selected from V-(W-)w(X-)xC((A-)aZ)c,
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D((A-)aZ)d)c,
V-( -)w(X-)xC(D(E((A-)aZ)e)d)c, and
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E(F((A-)aZ)f)e)d)c, wherein: V is selected from [O] and a specifier which is removed or transformed by a chemical, photochemical, physical, biological, or enzymatic activation, optionally after prior binding to a receptor;
(W-)w(X-)xC((A-)a)c,
(W-)w(X-)xC(D((A-)a)d)c, (W-)w(X-)xC(D(E((A-)a)e)d)c, and
(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E(F((A-)a)f)e)d)c are self-eliminating multiple release spacers or spacer systems;
W and X are each a single release l,(4+2n) electronic cascade spacer, being the same or different; A is a cyclization elimination spacer;
C, D, E, and F are each a self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system that upon activation can maximally release c, d, e, and f leaving groups, respectively; each Z is independently a leaving group or H or OH or a reactive moiety; a is 0 or 1; c, d, e, and f are independently an integer from 2 (included) to 24 (included); w and x are independently an integer from 0 (included) to 5 (included); n is an integer of 0 (included) to 10 (included).
5 A compound according to any of the preceding claims, wherein the self-elimination multiple release spacers or spacer systems C, D, E, and F are independently selected from compounds having the formula
G(P)g(H(P)h(l(P)i)h.)g.
—κ J(P)j(K(P)k(L(P)l)k.)j.
M(P)m(N(P)n(O(P)0)n.) m
Wherein B is selected from NR1, O, and S;
P is C(R2)(R3)Q-(W-)W(X-)X; wherein
Q has no meaning or is -O-CO-;
W and X are each a single release l,(4+2n) electronic cascade spacer, being the same or different;
G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, and O are independently selected from compounds having the formula:
Figure imgf000082_0001
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, and R5 independently represent H, Cι-6 alkyl, C -2o heterocyclyl, C5-2o aryl, Cι-6 alkoxy, hydroxy (OH), amino (NH2), mono-substituted amino (NRXH), di-substituted amino (NR^Rx 2), nitro (NO2), halogen, CF3, CN, CONH2, SO2Me, CONHMe, cyclic Cι-5 alkylamino, imidazolyl, Cι-6 alkylpiperazinyl, morpholino, thiol (SH), thioether (SRX), tetrazole, carboxy (COOH), carboxylate (COORx), sulphoxy (S(=O)2OH), sulphonate (S(=O)2ORx), sulphonyl (S(=O)2Rx), sulphixy (S(=O)OH), sulphinate (S(=O)ORx), sulphinyl (S(=O)Rx), phosphonooxy (OP(=O)(OH)2), and phosphate (OP(=O)(ORx)2), where Rx, R-.1 and Rx 2 are independently selected from a Cι-6 alkyl group, a C3-2o heterocyclyl group or a C5-20 aryl group, two or more of the substituents R1, R2, R3, R4, and R5 optionally being connected to one another to form one or more aliphatic or aromatic cyclic structures, or
G, J, and M may also be selected from the group of P and hydrogen with the proviso that if two of G, J, and M are hydrogen, the remaining group must be
Figure imgf000083_0001
or be
Figure imgf000083_0002
and at the same time be conjugated to
Figure imgf000083_0003
g, h, i, j, k, 1, m, n, o, h', g', k', j', n', m' are independently 0, 1, or 2 with the provisos that if G = hydrogen or P, g, h, i, h', and g' all equal 0; if J = hydrogen or P, j, k, 1, k', and j' all equal 0; if M = hydrogen or P, m, n, o, n', and m' all equal 0; if G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, or O is
Figure imgf000083_0004
then g + g1 = 1, h + lϊ = 1, i = 1, j + j' = 1, k + k' = 1, 1 = 1, m + m' = 1, n + n' = 1, or o ; 1, respectively;
if G, H, I, J, K, L, M, N, or O is
Figure imgf000084_0001
then g + g' = 2, h + h' = 2, i = 2, j + j' = 2, k + k' = 2, 1 = 2, m + m' = 2, n + n' = 2, or o :
1, respectively; if g' = 0 and G is not hydrogen or P, then h, h' , and i equal 0 and g > 0; if g = 0 and G is not hydrogen or P, then g' > 0; if g' > 0 and h' = 0, then i = 0 and h > 0; if g' > 0 and h = 0, then h' > 0 and i > 0; if j' = 0 and J is not hydrogen or P, then k, k', and 1 equal 0 and j > 0; if j = 0 and J is not hydrogen or P, then j ' > 0; if j' > 0 andk' = 0, then 1 = 0 andk > 0; if j' > 0 and k = 0, then k' > 0 and 1 > 0; if m' = 0 and M is not hydrogen or P, then n, n', and o equal 0 and m > 0; if m = 0 and M is not hydrogen or P, then m' > 0; if m' > 0 and n' = 0, then o = 0 and n > 0; ifm' > 0 andn = 0, then n' > 0 and o > 0; w and x are independently an integer from 0 (included) to 5 (included); with the proviso that if the compound contains only C and no D, no E, and no F are present, and B = NR1, and G and M are H, and g, h, i, h', g', k, 1, k', 1', m, n, o, n', and m' are 0, and J =
Figure imgf000084_0002
, and j = 2, and Q = -O-CO-, and w and x are 0, and R1, R2, R3, and R4 are
H, then at least one of the leaving groups Z is not connected to Q via an aliphatic amino group.
6 A compound according to any of the preceding claims, wherein the l,(4+2n) electronic cascade spacers W and X are independently selected from compounds having the formula
Figure imgf000085_0001
Q' = -R5C=CR6-, S, O, NR5, -R5C=N-, or -N=CR5- B = NR7, O, S P = C(R3)(R4)Q wherein
Q has no meaning or is -O-CO-; t, u, and y are independently an integer of 0 to 5;
T, U, and Y are independently selected from compounds having the formula:
Figure imgf000085_0002
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, and R9 independently represent H, Cι-6 alkyl, C3- 20 heterocyclyl, C5-2o aryl, Cι-6 alkoxy, hydroxy (OH), amino (NH2), mono-substituted amino (NRXH), di-substituted amino (NR^R* 2), nitro (NO2), halogen, CF , CN, CONH2, SO2Me, CONHMe, cyclic C1-5 alkylamino, imidazolyl, Cι-6 alkylpiperazinyl, morpholino, thiol (SH), thioether (SRX), tetrazole, carboxy (COOH), carboxylate (COORx), sulphoxy (S(=O)2OH), sulphonate (S(=O)2ORx), sulphonyl (S(=O)2Rx), sulphixy (S(=O)OH), sulphinate (S(=O)ORx), sulphinyl (S(=O)Rx), phosphonooxy (OP(=O)(OH)2), and phosphate (OP(=O)(ORx)2), where Rx, Rx l and Rx 2 are independently selected from a Cι-6 alkyl group, a C3. o heterocyclyl group or a C5_2o aryl group, two or more of the substituents R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, R8, or R9 optionally being connected to one another to form one or more aliphatic or aromatic cyclic structures.
7 A compound according to any of the preceding claims wherein the leaving groups Z are linked to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via an O, S, or aromatic N of the leaving group.
8 A compound according to any of the preceding claims wherein the leaving groups Z are linked to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via an aliphatic N and wherein at least one multiple release spacer or spacer system of either generation C, D (if present), E (if present), or F (if present) is a phenol- or thiophenol- based multiple release spacer or spacer system, meaning that i) B = O or S for at least one multiple release spacer in said generation, or ii) when B = N for all multiple release spacers in said generation, at least one single release spacer is connected to at least two branches of at least one multiple release spacer in said generation, and B = O or S for at least two of said single release spacers.
9 A compound according to claim 8 wherein B = O or S for all multiple release spacers or spacer systems in said generation.
10 A compound according to claims 8 or 9, wherein the phenol- or thiophenol-based multiple release spacers are connected to either A or Z or S, wherein S is as defined in claim 26.
11 A compound according to any of the preceding claims, wherein the ω-amino aminocarbonyl cyclization elimination spacer A is a compound having the formula:
Figure imgf000086_0001
wherein: a is an integer of 0 or 1 ; and b is an integer of 0 or 1 ; and c is an integer of 0 or 1; provided that a + b + c = 2 or 3;
and wherein R and R independently represent H, Cι-6 alkyl, said alkyl being optionally substituted with one or more of the following groups: hydroxy (OH), ether (ORx), amino (NH2), mono-substituted amino (NRXH), di-substituted amino (NR^R*2), nitro (NO2), halogen, CF3, CN, CONH2, SO2Me, CONHMe, cyclic C1-5 alkylamino, imidazolyl, Cι.6 alkylpiperazinyl, morpholino, thiol (SH), thioether (SRX), tetrazole, carboxy (COOH), carboxylate (COORx), sulphoxy (S(=O)2OH), sulphonate (S(=O)2ORx), sulphonyl (S(=O)2Rx), sulphixy (S(=O)OH), sulphinate (S(=O)ORx), sulphinyl (S(=O)Rx), phosphonooxy (OP(=O)(OH)2), and phosphate (OP(=O)(ORx)2), where Rx, Rx and Rx are selected from a Cι-6 alkyl group, a C3-2o heterocyclyl group or a C5-2o aryl group; and
R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 independently represent H, Cι-6 alkyl, C3-2o heterocyclyl, C5- 20 aryl, Cι-6 alkoxy, hydroxy (OH), amino (NH2), mono-substituted amino (NRXH), di- substituted amino (NR^Rx 2), nitro (NO2), halogen, CF3, CN, CONH2, SO2Me, CONHMe, cyclic Cι-5 alkylamino, imidazolyl, Cι-6 alkylpiperazinyl, morpholino, thiol (SH), thioether (SRX), tetrazole, carboxy (COOH), carboxylate (COORx), sulphoxy (S(=O)2OH), sulphonate (S(=O)2ORx), sulphonyl (S(=O)2Rx), sulphixy (S(=O)OH), sulphinate (S(=O)ORx), sulphinyl (S(=O)Rx), phosphonooxy (OP(=O)(OH)2), and phosphate (OP(=O)(ORx)2), where Rx, Rx and Rx 2 are selected from a Cι-6 alkyl group, a C3-2o heterocyclyl group or a C5-2o aryl group; and wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, and R8 can be a part of one or more aliphatic or aromatic cyclic structures, two or more of the substituents R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7, or R8 optionally being connected to one another to form one or more aliphatic or aromatic cyclic stractures.
12. A compound according to any of the preceding claims, wherein group A is an ω- amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacer, and Z is a moiety coupled via its hydroxyl group to A.
13 A compound according to any of the preceding claims wherein w + x > 0.
14 A compound according to any of the preceding claims wherein (W-)W(X-)XCC , (W-)w(X-)xC(Dd)c,
(W-)w(X-)xC(D(Ee)d)cor
(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E(Ff)e)d)c is selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000088_0001
Figure imgf000088_0002
Figure imgf000089_0001
Figure imgf000090_0001
Figure imgf000091_0001
Figure imgf000092_0001
Figure imgf000093_0001
92
Figure imgf000094_0001
Figure imgf000095_0001
R1 = O or OC(0)0 and from the compounds depicted above wherein single release 1,6-elimination p- aminobenzyloxycarbonyl spacer(s) are replaced by single release 1,8-elimination p- aminocinnamyloxycarbonyl spacer(s).
15 A compound according to claim 14 which further comprises ω-amino aminocarbonyl cyclization spacers A.
16 A compound according to any of the preceding claims wherein the specifier V contains a substrate that can be cleaved by plasmin, one of the cathepsins, cathepsin B, β-glucuronidase, prostate-specific antigen (PSA), urokinase-type plasminogen activator (u-PA), a member of the family of matrix metalloproteinases, or wherein the specifier V is [O] or contains a nitro-(hetero)aromatic moiety that can be removed or transformed by reduction under hypoxic conditions or by reduction by a nitroreductase.
17 A compound according to any of the preceding claims wherein Z is selected from an antibiotic, an anti-inflammatory agent, an anti-viral agent, and preferably an anticancer agent.
18 The compound of claim 17 wherein Z is selected from
(hydroxyl containing cytotoxic compounds) etoposide, combrestatin, camptothecin, irinotecan (CPT-11), SN-38, topotecan, 9-aminocamptothecin, 9-nitrocamptothecin, 10-hydroxycamptothecin, GG211, lurtotecan, paclitaxel, docetaxel, esperamycin, 1,8- dihydroxy-bicyclo[7.3.1 ]trideca-4-ene-2,6-diyne- 13 -one, anguidine, doxorubicin, morpholine-doxorabicin, N-(5,5-diacetoxypentyl) doxorubicin, daunorabicin, epirabicin, idarabicin, mitoxantrone, vincristine, vinblastine, tallysomycin, bleomycin,
4-bis(2-chloroethyl)aminophenol, 4-bis(2-fluoroethyl)aminophenol, and derivatives thereof,
(sulfhydryl containing compounds) esperamicin and 6-mercaptopurine, and derivatives thereof,
(carboxyl containing compounds) methotrexate, aminopterin, camptothecin (ring- opened form of the lactone), chlorambucil, melphalan, butyric acid and retinoic acid, and derivatives thereof, and (aziridine amino containing or aromatic amino containing compounds) mitomycin C, mitomycin A, an anthracycline derivative containing an amine functionality with sufficient leaving group ability, mitoxantrone, 9-amino camptothecin, methofrexate, aminopterin, tallysomycin, bleomycin, actinomycin, N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)-p- phenylenediamine, N,N-bis(2-fluoroethyl)-p-phenylenediamine, deoxycytidine, cytosine arabinoside, gemcitabine, and derivatives thereof, and (aliphatic amino containing compounds) daunorabicin, doxorubicin, epirabicin, idarabicin, N-(5,5-diacetoxypentyl)doxorabicin, an anthracycline, N8-acetyl spermidine, l-(2-chloroethyl)-l,2-dimethanesulfonyl hydrazine, or derivatives thereof.
19 A compound according to claim 18 wherein Z represents paclitaxel, docetaxel, or a derivative thereof, which is coupled to the self-eliminating multiple release, spacer or spacer system via its 2'-hydroxyl group.
20 A compound according to claim 18 wherein Z represents camptothecin, irinotecan (CPT-11), SN-38, topotecan, 9-aminocamptothecin, 9-nitrocamptothecin, 10-hydroxycamptothecin, GG211, lurtotecan, or a derivative thereof, which is coupled to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via its 20-hydroxyl group.
21 A compound according to claim 18 wherein Z represents SN-38, topotecan, 10- hydroxycamptothecin, etoposide, 4-bis(2-chloroethyl)aminophenol, 4-bis(2- fluoroethyl)aminophenol, or a derivative thereof, which is coupled to the self- eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via its phenolic hydroxyl group.
22 A compound according to claim 18 wherein Z represents 9-aminocamptothecin, N,N-bis(2-chloroethyl)-p-phenylenediamine, N,N-bis(2-fluoroethyl)-p- phenylenediamine, or a derivative thereof, which is coupled to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via its aromatic primary amine group.
23 A compound according to claim 18 wherein Z represents daunorabicin, doxorubicin, epirabicin, idarabicin, N-(5,5-diacetoxypentyl)doxorabicin, an anthracycline, N8-acetyl spermidine, l-(2-chloroethyl)-l,2-dimethanesulfonyl hydrazine, or derivatives thereof, which is coupled to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system via its primary aliphatic amino group and wherein at least one multiple release spacer or spacer system of either generation C, D (if present), E (if present), or F (if present) is a phenol- or thiophenol-based multiple release spacer or spacer system, meaning that i) B = O or S for at least one multiple release spacer in said generation, or ii) when B = N for all multiple release spacers in said generation, at least one single release spacer is connected to at least two branches of at least one multiple release spacer in said generation, and B = O or S for at least two of said single release spacers.
24 A compound according to claim 23 wherein B = O or S for all multiple release spacers or spacer systems in said generation.
25 A compound according to claims 23 or 24, wherein the phenol- or thiophenol- based multiple release spacers are connected to either A or Z or S, wherein S is as defined in claim 26.
26 A compound having a formula selected from V-(W-)w(X-)xC((A-)aS)c, V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D((A-)aS)d)c,
N-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E((A-)aS)e)d)c, and
N-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E(F((A-)aS)f)e)d)c, wherein:
N, W, X, C, D, E, F, A, w, x, c, d, e, f, and a are defined as in the preceding claims, and each S independently has no meaning or is H, OH, or a reactive moiety that allows for coupling the multiple release spacer system to leaving groups Z, which may be the same or different, to afford compounds
N-(W-)w(X-)xC((A-)aZ)c,
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D((A-)aZ)d)c, N-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E((A-)aZ)e)d)c, and
V-(W-)w(X-)xC(D(E(F((A-)aZ)f)e)d)c, respectively. 27 A compound according to claim 26 wherein the reactive moiety S is connected via a carbonyl group to the multiple release spacer or spacer system.
28 A compound according to claim 27 wherein S represents N-succinimidyl-N- oxide, -nitrophenoxide, pentafluorophenoxide, or chloride.
29 A compound according to claim 26 wherein S is connected to the methylene group of the multiple release spacer or spacer system.
30 A compound according to claim 29 wherein S represents chloride, bromide, p- toluenesulfonate, trifluoromethylsulfonate, or methylsulfonate.
31 A compound according to any of the preceding claims wherein the specifier N is a tripeptide.
32 A compound according to claim 31 wherein the tripeptide is linked via its C- terminus to the self-eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system.
33 The compound of claim 32 wherein the C-terminal amino acid residue of the tripeptide is selected from arginine and lysine, the middle amino acid residue of the tripeptide is selected from alanine, valine, leucine, isoleucine, methionine, phenylalanine, cyclohexylglycine, tryptophan and proline, and the Ν-terminal amino acid residue of the tripeptide is selected from a D-amino acid residue and a protected L- amino acid residue including protected glycine.
34 A compound according to claim 33 wherein the specifier N is selected from D- alanylphenylalanyllysine, D-valylleucyllysine, D-alanylleucyllysine, D- valylphenylalanyllysine, D-valyltryptophanyllysine and D-alanyltryptophanyllysine.
35 A compound according to any of the preceding claims wherein the specifier N is an amino-terminal capped peptide covalently linked via the C-terminus to the self- eliminating multiple release spacer or spacer system. 36 The compound of claim 35 wherein the specifier V is selected from benzyloxycarbonylphenylalanyllysine, benzyloxycarbonylvalyllysine, D- phenylalanylphenylalanyllysine, benzyloxycarbonylvalylcitralline, tert-butyl oxycarbonylphenylalanyllysine, benzyloxycarbonylalanylarginylarginine, benzyloxycarbonylphenylalanyl-N-tosylarginine, 2- aminoethylthiosuccinimidopropionylvalinylcitralline, 2- aminoethylthiosuccinimidopropionyllysylphenylalanyllysine, acetylphenylalanyllysine, andbenzyloxycarbonylphenylalanyl-O-benzoylthreonine.
37 A compound according to any of the preceding claims wherein the specifier V comprises a reactive moiety that can be used to couple said compound to a targeting moiety.
38 A compound according to claim 37 in which the reactive moiety is
Figure imgf000100_0001
, wherein X is een leaving group.
39 A compound according to claim 37 in which the reactive moiety is an N- hydroxysuccinimide ester, a^-nitrophenyl ester, a pentafluorophenyl ester, an isothiocyanate, an isocyanate, an anhydride, an acid chloride, a sulfonyl chloride, and an aldehyde.
40 A compound according to claim 37 in which the reactive moiety is a hydrazine group or an amino group.
41 A compoimd according to any of the preceding claims wherein the specifier N comprises a targeting moiety.
42 A compound according to claim 41 in which the targeting moiety is selected from the group consisting of a protein or protein fragment, an antibody or an antibody fragment, a receptor-binding or peptide vector moiety and a polymeric or dendritic moiety.
43 A compound according to any of the preceding claims selected from the group consisting of
Figure imgf000101_0001
Figure imgf000102_0001
Figure imgf000103_0001
Figure imgf000104_0001
Figure imgf000104_0002
HΥ M H
Figure imgf000104_0003
Figure imgf000104_0004
Figure imgf000105_0001
Figure imgf000106_0001
and salts thereof.
44 The use of a compound according to claim 26-30 or 37-40 for the preparation of a compound of claim 4.
45 Diagnostic assay process in which a compound according to any of the preceding claims is used.
46 Process according to claim 45 in which the presence or amount of an enzyme is determined.
47 Process according to claim 46 in which the presence or amount of a protease is determined.
48 Process according to claim 47 in which the compound that is used comprises a substrate for said protease and leaving group Z is detected.
49 Process according to claim 47 in which the compound that is used comprises a substrate for an enzyme, which is the product of cleavage of its pro-enzyme precursor by said protease and leaving group Z is detected.
50 A composite structure comprising two or more compounds according to any of the preceding claims, connected with a polymeric structure.
51 A compound according to any of the preceding claims, wherein the specifier V is removed or transformed by an enzyme that is transported to the vicinity of or inside target cells or target tissue via ADEPT, PDEPT, MDEPT, NDEPT, or GDEPT. 52 Use of a compound according to any of the preceding claims for the preparation of a pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of a mammal being in need thereof.
53 A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound according to any of claims 1 to 51.
54 A process for preparing a pharmaceutical composition comprising the step of mixing a compound according to any of claims 1 to 51 with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
55 A method of treating a mammal being in need thereof, whereby the method comprises the administration of a pharmaceutical composition according to claim 52 or 53 or is obtained according to the process of claim 54, to the mammal in a therapeutically effective dose.
PCT/NL2003/000804 2002-11-14 2003-11-14 Prodrugs built as multiple self-elimination-release spacers WO2004043493A1 (en)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US10/534,777 US7705045B2 (en) 2002-11-14 2003-11-14 Prodrugs built as multiple self-elimination-release spacers
AU2003282624A AU2003282624A1 (en) 2002-11-14 2003-11-14 Prodrugs built as multiple self-elimination-release spacers
CA002506080A CA2506080A1 (en) 2002-11-14 2003-11-14 Prodrugs built as multiple self-elimination-release spacers
EP03774383A EP1560599A1 (en) 2002-11-14 2003-11-14 Prodrugs built as multiple self-elimination-release spacers
JP2004551297A JP2006507322A (en) 2002-11-14 2003-11-14 Prodrugs constructed as multiple self-detaching release spacers

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
NLPCT/NL02/00732 2002-11-14
NL0200732 2002-11-14

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2004043493A1 true WO2004043493A1 (en) 2004-05-27

Family

ID=32310914

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/NL2003/000804 WO2004043493A1 (en) 2002-11-14 2003-11-14 Prodrugs built as multiple self-elimination-release spacers

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (1) US7705045B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1560599A1 (en)
JP (1) JP2006507322A (en)
AU (1) AU2003282624A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2506080A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2004043493A1 (en)

Cited By (163)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1579873A1 (en) * 2004-03-23 2005-09-28 Complex Biosystems GmbH Polymeric prodrugs
WO2005099768A2 (en) * 2004-03-23 2005-10-27 Complex Biosystems Gmbh Polymeric prodrug with a self-immolative linker
WO2006003014A2 (en) * 2004-07-05 2006-01-12 Complex Biosystems Gmbh Hydrogel polymeric conjugates of a prodrug
EP1625855A1 (en) * 2004-08-13 2006-02-15 Complex Biosystems GmbH Polymeric prodrug with a self-immolative linker
EP1625856A1 (en) * 2004-08-13 2006-02-15 Complex Biosystems GmbH Hydrogel polymeric conjugates of a prodrug
WO2007018431A2 (en) * 2005-08-05 2007-02-15 Syntarga B.V. Triazole-containing releasable linkers and conjugates comprising the same
WO2009017394A1 (en) 2007-08-01 2009-02-05 Syntarga B.V. Substituted cc-1065 analogs and their conjugates
EP2123305A1 (en) * 2008-05-23 2009-11-25 KTB Tumorforschungsgesellschaft mbH Linear self-eliminating oligomers
EP2111872A3 (en) * 2004-07-05 2009-12-23 Complex Biosystems GmbH Hydrogel polymeric conjugates of a prodrug
WO2010100220A1 (en) 2009-03-05 2010-09-10 Ascendis Pharma As Interferon alpha carrier prodrugs
WO2010120561A1 (en) 2009-04-01 2010-10-21 Genentech, Inc. Anti-fcrh5 antibodies and immunoconjugates and methods of use
WO2011073234A2 (en) 2009-12-15 2011-06-23 Ascendis Pharma As Growth hormone composition
US7968586B2 (en) 2005-11-10 2011-06-28 Medarex, Inc. Cytotoxic compounds and conjugates
WO2011089216A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2011-07-28 Ascendis Pharma As Dipeptide-based prodrug linkers for aliphatic amine-containing drugs
WO2011089215A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2011-07-28 Ascendis Pharma As Dipeptide-based prodrug linkers for aromatic amine-containing drugs
EP2354163A2 (en) 2005-09-26 2011-08-10 Medarex, Inc. Conjugates of duocarmycin and anti-CD70 or anti-PSMA antibodies
WO2011133039A2 (en) 2010-04-21 2011-10-27 Syntarga B.V. Novel conjugates of cc-1065 analogs and bifunctional linkers
WO2011147986A1 (en) 2010-05-27 2011-12-01 Genmab A/S Monoclonal antibodies against her2
WO2011147982A2 (en) 2010-05-27 2011-12-01 Genmab A/S Monoclonal antibodies against her2 epitope
WO2011153346A1 (en) 2010-06-03 2011-12-08 Genentech, Inc. Immuno-pet imaging of antibodies and immunoconjugates and uses therefor
WO2011157741A2 (en) 2010-06-15 2011-12-22 Genmab A/S Human antibody drug conjugates against tissue factor
WO2012016227A2 (en) 2010-07-29 2012-02-02 Xencor, Inc. Antibodies with modified isoelectric points
WO2012045085A1 (en) 2010-10-01 2012-04-05 Oxford Biotherapeutics Ltd. Anti-rori antibodies
EP2447282A2 (en) 2006-05-30 2012-05-02 Genentech, Inc. Anti-CD22 Antibodies, their Immunoconjugates and uses thereof
WO2012092616A1 (en) 2010-12-30 2012-07-05 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Conjugated anti-cd38 antibodies
EP2474557A2 (en) 2007-07-16 2012-07-11 Genentech, Inc. Anti-CD79b antibodies and immunoconjugates and methods of use
WO2012143523A1 (en) 2011-04-20 2012-10-26 Genmab A/S Bispecifc antibodies against her2
WO2013004842A2 (en) 2011-07-06 2013-01-10 Genmab A/S Antibody variants and uses thereof
WO2013022855A1 (en) 2011-08-05 2013-02-14 Xencor, Inc. Antibodies with modified isoelectric points and immunofiltering
US8399403B2 (en) 2004-05-19 2013-03-19 Medarex, Inc. Chemical linkers and conjugates thereof
WO2013055809A1 (en) 2011-10-10 2013-04-18 Xencor, Inc. A method for purifying antibodies
WO2013064508A1 (en) 2011-11-03 2013-05-10 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Polyethylene glycol based prodrug of adrenomedullin and use thereof
WO2013064455A1 (en) 2011-11-03 2013-05-10 Bayer Intellectual Property Gmbh Tyrosine based linkers for the releasable connection of peptides
WO2013092998A1 (en) 2011-12-23 2013-06-27 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of antibodies
EP2641618A2 (en) 2007-07-16 2013-09-25 Genentech, Inc. Humanized anti-CD79B antibodies and immunoconjugates and methods of use
WO2013149946A1 (en) 2012-04-05 2013-10-10 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Functionalized thieno-indole derivatives for the treatment of cancer
WO2013149948A1 (en) 2012-04-05 2013-10-10 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. New alkylating agents
EP2657253A2 (en) 2008-01-31 2013-10-30 Genentech, Inc. Anti-CD79b antibodies and immunoconjugates and methods of use
WO2014006217A1 (en) 2012-07-06 2014-01-09 Genmab B.V. Dimeric protein with triple mutations
WO2014009426A2 (en) 2012-07-13 2014-01-16 Innate Pharma Screening of conjugated antibodies
WO2014018625A1 (en) 2012-07-25 2014-01-30 Kolltan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Anti-kit antibodies and uses thereof
WO2014108198A1 (en) 2013-01-10 2014-07-17 Genmab B.V. Human igg1 fc region variants and uses thereof
WO2014113510A1 (en) 2013-01-15 2014-07-24 Xencor, Inc. Rapid clearance of antigen complexes using novel antibodies
WO2014144871A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 The Centre For Drug Research And Development Cytotoxic and anti-mitotic compounds, and methods of using the same
WO2014140300A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 Innate Pharma Solid phase tgase-mediated conjugation of antibodies
WO2014145806A2 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
EP2845866A1 (en) 2006-10-27 2015-03-11 Genentech, Inc. Antibodies and immunoconjugates and uses therefor
US8980242B2 (en) 2005-06-22 2015-03-17 Ascendis Pharma Gmbh Aliphatic prodrug linker
WO2015052537A1 (en) 2013-10-11 2015-04-16 Oxford Biotherapeutics Ltd Conjugated antibodies against ly75 for the treatment of cancer
WO2015095953A1 (en) 2013-12-27 2015-07-02 The Centre For Drug Research And Development Sulfonamide-containing linkage systems for drug conjugates
US9133276B2 (en) 2010-09-17 2015-09-15 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Prodrugs comprising an exendin linker conjugate
US9138462B2 (en) 2009-07-31 2015-09-22 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Prodrugs comprising an insulin linker conjugate
WO2015149077A1 (en) 2014-03-28 2015-10-01 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific antibodies that bind to cd38 and cd3
WO2016005593A1 (en) 2014-07-11 2016-01-14 Genmab A/S Antibodies binding axl
WO2016014984A1 (en) 2014-07-24 2016-01-28 Xencor, Inc. Rapid clearance of antigen complexes using novel antibodies
US9265723B2 (en) 2009-07-31 2016-02-23 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Long acting insulin composition
US9272048B2 (en) 2008-04-29 2016-03-01 Ascendis Pharma Growth Disorders Division A/S PEGylated recombinant human growth hormone compounds
WO2016041082A1 (en) 2014-09-17 2016-03-24 CDRD Ventures, Inc. Cytotoxic and anti-mitotic compounds, and methods of using the same
WO2016046301A1 (en) 2014-09-26 2016-03-31 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Stabilized adrenomedullin derivatives and use thereof
WO2016071418A1 (en) 2014-11-05 2016-05-12 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Functionalized morpholinyl anthracycline derivatives
US9427478B2 (en) 2013-06-21 2016-08-30 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of polypeptides
WO2016141387A1 (en) 2015-03-05 2016-09-09 Xencor, Inc. Modulation of t cells with bispecific antibodies and fc fusions
EP3088004A1 (en) 2004-09-23 2016-11-02 Genentech, Inc. Cysteine engineered antibodies and conjugates
CN106083769A (en) * 2016-06-12 2016-11-09 南京医科大学 A kind of reduce response prodrugs of paclitaxel and prepare nano-micelle carrier method
US9493578B2 (en) 2009-09-02 2016-11-15 Xencor, Inc. Compositions and methods for simultaneous bivalent and monovalent co-engagement of antigens
US9556192B2 (en) 2012-10-30 2017-01-31 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Functionalized 9-bromo-camptothecin derivatives
US9605084B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-03-28 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
US9650446B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2017-05-16 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
US9701759B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2017-07-11 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
WO2017121877A1 (en) 2016-01-13 2017-07-20 Genmab A/S Axl-specific antibody-drug conjugates for cancer treatment
US9850320B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2017-12-26 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies to CD3 X CD20
US9856327B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2018-01-02 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies to CD3 X CD123
WO2018004338A1 (en) 2016-06-27 2018-01-04 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Cleavable tetrazine used in bio-orthogonal drug activation
US9901567B2 (en) 2007-08-01 2018-02-27 Syntarga B.V. Substituted CC-1065 analogs and their conjugates
US9943610B2 (en) 2012-12-21 2018-04-17 Bioalliance C.V. Hydrophilic self-immolative linkers and conjugates thereof
US9950077B2 (en) 2014-06-20 2018-04-24 Bioalliance C.V. Anti-folate receptor alpha (FRA) antibody-drug conjugates and methods of using thereof
WO2018083126A1 (en) 2016-11-01 2018-05-11 Genmab B.V. Polypeptide variants and uses thereof
US10036010B2 (en) 2012-11-09 2018-07-31 Innate Pharma Recognition tags for TGase-mediated conjugation
WO2018138032A2 (en) 2017-01-24 2018-08-02 Innate Pharma NKp46 BINDING AGENTS
WO2018141959A1 (en) 2017-02-06 2018-08-09 Innate Pharma Immunomodulatory antibody drug conjugates binding to a human mica polypeptide
US10071169B2 (en) 2013-06-20 2018-09-11 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of polypeptides
US10106624B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-10-23 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
WO2018199337A1 (en) 2017-04-28 2018-11-01 味の素株式会社 Compound having substance that has affinity for soluble protein, cleavable moiety, and reactive group, or salt thereof
US10131710B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2018-11-20 Xencor, Inc. Optimized antibody variable regions
EP3421495A2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-01-02 Xencor, Inc. Modulation of t cells with bispecific antibodies and fc fusions
CN109134516A (en) * 2018-08-27 2019-01-04 苏州大学 A kind of dimer prodrug and a kind of light regulation Nano medication and application with tumor microenvironment response
US10174048B2 (en) 2015-07-21 2019-01-08 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Asymmetric process for the preparation of thieno-indoles derivatives
US10227410B2 (en) 2015-12-07 2019-03-12 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and PSMA
US10266547B2 (en) 2013-09-25 2019-04-23 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Thieno[2,3-e]indole derivatives as new antitumor agents
WO2019092148A1 (en) 2017-11-10 2019-05-16 Innate Pharma Antibodies with functionalized glutamine residues
US10316088B2 (en) 2016-06-28 2019-06-11 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind somatostatin receptor 2
WO2019145455A1 (en) 2018-01-24 2019-08-01 Genmab B.V. Polypeptide variants and uses thereof
US10428155B2 (en) 2014-12-22 2019-10-01 Xencor, Inc. Trispecific antibodies
WO2019212356A1 (en) 2018-05-04 2019-11-07 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B .V. Tetrazines for high click conjugation yield in vivo and high click release yield
WO2019212357A1 (en) 2018-05-04 2019-11-07 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Compounds comprising a linker for increasing transcyclooctene stability
US10472422B2 (en) 2016-01-08 2019-11-12 Abgenomics International Inc. Tetravalent anti-PSGL-1 antibodies and uses thereof
US10487155B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2019-11-26 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
US10501543B2 (en) 2016-10-14 2019-12-10 Xencor, Inc. IL15/IL15Rα heterodimeric Fc-fusion proteins
WO2019240287A1 (en) 2018-06-14 2019-12-19 味の素株式会社 Compound comprising substance having affinity for antibody, cleavage site and reactive group, or salt thereof
WO2019238843A1 (en) 2018-06-14 2019-12-19 Berlin-Chemie Ag Pharmaceutical combinations
WO2019240288A1 (en) 2018-06-14 2019-12-19 味の素株式会社 Substance having affinity for antibody, and compound or salt thereof having bioorthogonal functional group
US10519242B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-12-31 Xencor, Inc. Targeting regulatory T cells with heterodimeric proteins
US10526417B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2020-01-07 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and CD38
WO2020010079A2 (en) 2018-07-02 2020-01-09 Amgen Inc. Anti-steap1 antigen-binding protein
EP3632462A1 (en) 2012-07-06 2020-04-08 Genmab B.V. Dimeric protein with triple mutations
US10640508B2 (en) 2017-10-13 2020-05-05 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Diazene directed modular synthesis of compounds with quaternary carbon centers
WO2020090979A1 (en) 2018-10-31 2020-05-07 味の素株式会社 Compound comprising substance with affinity for antibody, cleavage site and reactive group, or salt thereof
US10787518B2 (en) 2016-06-14 2020-09-29 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific checkpoint inhibitor antibodies
US10793632B2 (en) 2016-08-30 2020-10-06 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific immunomodulatory antibodies that bind costimulatory and checkpoint receptors
US10851178B2 (en) 2011-10-10 2020-12-01 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric human IgG1 polypeptides with isoelectric point modifications
US10858417B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-12-08 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
WO2020254197A1 (en) 2019-06-18 2020-12-24 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Adrenomedullin-analogues for long-term stabilization and their use
WO2020256545A1 (en) 2019-06-17 2020-12-24 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Agents for cleaving labels from biomolecules in vivo
WO2020256544A1 (en) 2019-06-17 2020-12-24 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Tetrazines for high click release speed and yield
WO2020256546A1 (en) 2019-06-17 2020-12-24 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Compounds for fast and efficient click release
EP3763740A1 (en) 2011-01-26 2021-01-13 Celldex Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-kit antibodies and uses thereof
US10918627B2 (en) 2016-05-11 2021-02-16 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Convergent and enantioselective total synthesis of Communesin analogs
US10918735B2 (en) 2012-12-04 2021-02-16 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Substituted pyrazino[1′,2′:1,5]pyrrolo[2,3-b]indole-1,4-diones for cancer treatment
EP3778917A2 (en) 2009-12-04 2021-02-17 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Multispecific antibodies, antibody analogs, compositions, and methods
US10968276B2 (en) 2013-03-12 2021-04-06 Xencor, Inc. Optimized anti-CD3 variable regions
US10981992B2 (en) 2017-11-08 2021-04-20 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific immunomodulatory antibodies that bind costimulatory and checkpoint receptors
US10982006B2 (en) 2018-04-04 2021-04-20 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind fibroblast activation protein
US11053316B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2021-07-06 Xencor, Inc. Optimized antibody variable regions
WO2021142086A1 (en) 2020-01-08 2021-07-15 Synthis Therapeutics, Inc. Alk5 inhibitor conjugates and uses thereof
WO2021151984A1 (en) 2020-01-31 2021-08-05 Innate Pharma Treatment of cancer
US11084863B2 (en) 2017-06-30 2021-08-10 Xencor, Inc. Targeted heterodimeric Fc fusion proteins containing IL-15 IL-15alpha and antigen binding domains
WO2021251358A1 (en) 2020-06-09 2021-12-16 味の素株式会社 Modified ferritin and method for producing same
WO2022008419A1 (en) 2020-07-06 2022-01-13 Byondis B.V. Antifolate linker-drugs and antibody-drug conjugates
WO2022058594A1 (en) 2020-09-18 2022-03-24 Araris Biotech Ag Transglutaminase conjugation method with amino acid-based linkers
US11312770B2 (en) 2017-11-08 2022-04-26 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific and monospecific antibodies using novel anti-PD-1 sequences
US11319355B2 (en) 2017-12-19 2022-05-03 Xencor, Inc. Engineered IL-2 Fc fusion proteins
WO2022112356A1 (en) 2020-11-25 2022-06-02 Innate Pharma Treatment of cancer
US11358999B2 (en) 2018-10-03 2022-06-14 Xencor, Inc. IL-12 heterodimeric Fc-fusion proteins
US11365258B2 (en) 2017-03-10 2022-06-21 Berlin-Chemie Ag Pharmaceutical combinations comprising an anti-LY75 antibody
WO2022154116A1 (en) 2021-01-18 2022-07-21 味の素株式会社 Compound or salt thereof, and antibody produced using same
WO2022154127A1 (en) 2021-01-18 2022-07-21 味の素株式会社 Compound or salt thereof, and antibody obtained therefrom
WO2022191283A1 (en) 2021-03-11 2022-09-15 味の素株式会社 Compound or salt thereof, and antibody obtained using same
WO2022196675A1 (en) 2021-03-16 2022-09-22 味の素株式会社 Complex or salt thereof, and method for manufacturing same
US11472890B2 (en) 2019-03-01 2022-10-18 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind ENPP3 and CD3
US11505595B2 (en) 2018-04-18 2022-11-22 Xencor, Inc. TIM-3 targeted heterodimeric fusion proteins containing IL-15/IL-15RA Fc-fusion proteins and TIM-3 antigen binding domains
WO2022248835A1 (en) 2021-05-26 2022-12-01 Oxford Biotherapeutics Ltd Pharmaceutical combination comprising an anti-cd205 antibody and an immune checkpoint inhibitor
US11524991B2 (en) 2018-04-18 2022-12-13 Xencor, Inc. PD-1 targeted heterodimeric fusion proteins containing IL-15/IL-15Ra Fc-fusion proteins and PD-1 antigen binding domains and uses thereof
US11535634B2 (en) 2019-06-05 2022-12-27 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Compounds, conjugates, and compositions of epipolythiodiketopiperazines and polythiodiketopiperazines and uses thereof
WO2023275025A1 (en) 2021-06-28 2023-01-05 Byondis B.V. Conjugates comprising phosphoantigens and their use in therapy
US11591401B2 (en) 2020-08-19 2023-02-28 Xencor, Inc. Anti-CD28 compositions
WO2023054706A1 (en) 2021-09-30 2023-04-06 味の素株式会社 Conjugate of antibody and functional substance or salt thereof, and antibody derivative and compound or salts thereof to be used in producing conjugate or salt thereof
WO2023089314A1 (en) 2021-11-18 2023-05-25 Oxford Biotherapeutics Limited Pharmaceutical combinations
WO2023126297A1 (en) 2021-12-30 2023-07-06 Byondis B.V. Antifolate linker-drugs and antibody-drug conjugates
WO2023158305A1 (en) 2022-02-15 2023-08-24 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Masked il12 protein
US11739144B2 (en) 2021-03-09 2023-08-29 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and CLDN6
WO2023227660A1 (en) 2022-05-25 2023-11-30 Innate Pharma Nectin-4 binding agents
US11859012B2 (en) 2021-03-10 2024-01-02 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and GPC3
US11919956B2 (en) 2020-05-14 2024-03-05 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind prostate specific membrane antigen (PSMA) and CD3
US11932650B2 (en) 2017-05-11 2024-03-19 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Potent agelastatin derivatives as modulators for cancer invasion and metastasis
WO2024080872A1 (en) 2022-10-12 2024-04-18 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Strained bicyclononenes
US12016903B2 (en) 2014-11-21 2024-06-25 Ascendis Pharma Endocrinology Division A/S Long-acting growth hormone treatment
WO2024133374A1 (en) 2022-12-22 2024-06-27 Byondis B.V. Novel linker drugs comprising phosphoantigens, novel conjugates and their use in therapy
US12030888B2 (en) 2021-02-24 2024-07-09 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Himastatin derivatives, and processes of preparation thereof, and uses thereof
US12076412B2 (en) 2020-10-25 2024-09-03 Araris Biotech Ag Antibody-drug conjugates through specific linker oligopeptides
EP4427762A1 (en) 2023-03-10 2024-09-11 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Trans-cyclooctene with improved t-linker
WO2024191293A1 (en) 2023-03-10 2024-09-19 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Trans-cyclooctene with improved t-linker
US12128110B2 (en) 2017-09-19 2024-10-29 Paul Scherrer Institut Transglutaminase conjugation method and linker
US12133883B2 (en) 2014-11-18 2024-11-05 Ascendis Pharma Endocrinology Division A/S Polymeric hGH prodrugs

Families Citing this family (98)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20110313230A1 (en) 2001-05-11 2011-12-22 Terrance Grant Johns Specific binding proteins and uses thereof
US20100056762A1 (en) 2001-05-11 2010-03-04 Old Lloyd J Specific binding proteins and uses thereof
EP1392359B2 (en) 2001-05-11 2013-03-13 Ludwig Institute for Cancer Research Ltd. Specific binding proteins and uses thereof
US8795721B2 (en) * 2006-12-18 2014-08-05 Eatlittle Inc. Device for delivery of a substance
CN104013956B (en) 2007-01-25 2018-12-18 达娜-法勃肿瘤研究所公司 Purposes of the anti-egfr antibodies in the mutant mediated disease for the treatment of EGFR
WO2008115404A1 (en) 2007-03-15 2008-09-25 Ludwing Institute For Cancer Research Treatment method using egfr antibodies and src inhibitors and related formulations
ES2609915T3 (en) 2007-08-14 2017-04-25 Ludwig Institute For Cancer Research Ltd. Monoclonal antibody 175 addressed to the EGF receptor and derivatives and uses thereof
MX2010012649A (en) 2008-05-20 2010-12-21 Neurogesx Inc Carbonate prodrugs and methods of using the same.
AU2009249067A1 (en) * 2008-05-20 2009-11-26 Neurogesx, Inc. Water-soluble acetaminophen analogs
AU2009320481C1 (en) * 2008-11-03 2016-12-08 Syntarga B.V. Novel CC-1065 analogs and their conjugates
EP2462238B1 (en) 2009-08-07 2013-07-17 Ohmx Corporation Enzyme triggered redox altering chemical elimination (e-trace) immunoassay
US9624522B2 (en) 2009-08-07 2017-04-18 Ohmx Corporation Single, direct detection of hemoglobin A1c percentage using enzyme triggered redox altering chemical elimination (e-trace) immunoassay
US20110076232A1 (en) 2009-09-29 2011-03-31 Ludwig Institute For Cancer Research Specific binding proteins and uses thereof
WO2011130598A1 (en) 2010-04-15 2011-10-20 Spirogen Limited Pyrrolobenzodiazepines and conjugates thereof
WO2012100078A1 (en) 2011-01-19 2012-07-26 Ohmx Corporation Enzyme triggered redox altering chemical elimination (e-trace) immmunoassay
DK2750713T3 (en) 2011-10-14 2015-12-21 Medimmune Ltd PYRROLOBENZODIAZEPINS AND CONJUGATES THEREOF
CA2854459A1 (en) 2011-11-04 2013-05-10 Ohmx Corporation Novel chemistry used in biosensors
WO2013106434A1 (en) 2012-01-09 2013-07-18 Ohmx Corporation Enzyme cascade methods for e-trace assay signal amplification
CN107099016A (en) * 2012-05-18 2017-08-29 伊利诺伊大学董事会 Trigger response chain fragmentation polymer
WO2013177481A1 (en) 2012-05-25 2013-11-28 Immunogen, Inc. Benzodiazepines and conjugates thereof
JP6199387B2 (en) 2012-07-27 2017-09-20 オームクス コーポレイション Electron measurement of monolayers after homogeneous reaction of components
CA2880104A1 (en) 2012-07-27 2014-01-30 Ohmx Corporation Electric measurement of monolayers following pro-cleave detection of presence and activity of enzymes and other target analytes
WO2014057119A1 (en) 2012-10-12 2014-04-17 Adc Therapeutics Sàrl Pyrrolobenzodiazepine-antibody conjugates
US10736903B2 (en) 2012-10-12 2020-08-11 Medimmune Limited Pyrrolobenzodiazepine-anti-PSMA antibody conjugates
EP2906251B1 (en) 2012-10-12 2017-09-27 ADC Therapeutics SA Pyrrolobenzodiazepine-anti-cd22 antibody conjugates
US10695433B2 (en) 2012-10-12 2020-06-30 Medimmune Limited Pyrrolobenzodiazepine-antibody conjugates
US9931414B2 (en) 2012-10-12 2018-04-03 Medimmune Limited Pyrrolobenzodiazepine-antibody conjugates
RS53818B1 (en) 2012-10-12 2015-06-30 Spirogen Sàrl Pyrrolobenzodiazepines and conjugates thereof
PT2906253T (en) 2012-10-12 2018-11-05 Medimmune Ltd Pyrrolobenzodiazepine - anti-psma antibody conjugates
JP6527466B2 (en) 2012-12-21 2019-06-05 メドイミューン・リミテッドＭｅｄＩｍｍｕｎｅ Ｌｉｍｉｔｅｄ Asymmetric pyrrolobenzodiazepine dimers for use in the treatment of proliferative and autoimmune diseases
WO2014096368A1 (en) 2012-12-21 2014-06-26 Spirogen Sàrl Pyrrolobenzodiazepines and conjugates thereof
EA027910B1 (en) 2013-03-13 2017-09-29 Медимьюн Лимитед Pyrrolobenzodiazepines and conjugates thereof
BR112015023333A8 (en) 2013-03-13 2018-04-17 Medimmune Ltd pyrrolbenzodiazepines and conjugates thereof
JP6340019B2 (en) 2013-03-13 2018-06-06 メドイミューン・リミテッドＭｅｄＩｍｍｕｎｅ Ｌｉｍｉｔｅｄ Pyrrolobenzodiazepine and its conjugates
PT2968588T (en) 2013-03-15 2019-05-08 Abbvie Inc Anti-egfr antibody drug conjugate formulations
KR20150132864A (en) 2013-03-15 2015-11-26 애브비 인코포레이티드 Antibody drug conjugate(adc) purification
WO2015038426A1 (en) 2013-09-13 2015-03-19 Asana Biosciences, Llc Self-immolative linkers containing mandelic acid derivatives, drug-ligand conjugates for targeted therapies and uses thereof
WO2015052535A1 (en) 2013-10-11 2015-04-16 Spirogen Sàrl Pyrrolobenzodiazepine-antibody conjugates
GB201317982D0 (en) 2013-10-11 2013-11-27 Spirogen Sarl Pyrrolobenzodiazepines and conjugates thereof
WO2015052532A1 (en) 2013-10-11 2015-04-16 Spirogen Sàrl Pyrrolobenzodiazepine-antibody conjugates
EP3054985B1 (en) 2013-10-11 2018-12-26 Medimmune Limited Pyrrolobenzodiazepine-antibody conjugates
CA2935430C (en) 2014-01-10 2018-09-18 Synthon Biopharmaceuticals B.V. Duocarmycin adcs for use in treatment of endometrial cancer
DK2948184T3 (en) 2014-01-10 2016-06-27 Synthon Biopharmaceuticals Bv Duocarmycin-ADCs with improved in vivo antitumor activity
KR102323301B1 (en) 2014-01-10 2021-11-09 비온디스 비.브이. Method for purifying cys-linked antibody-drug conjugates
GB201406767D0 (en) 2014-04-15 2014-05-28 Cancer Rec Tech Ltd Humanized anti-Tn-MUC1 antibodies anf their conjugates
AU2015282627B2 (en) 2014-06-30 2020-04-02 Glykos Finland Oy Saccharide derivative of a toxic payload and antibody conjugates thereof
WO2016025539A1 (en) 2014-08-11 2016-02-18 Ohmx Corporation Enzyme triggered redox altering chemical elimination (-trace) assay with multiplexing capabilities
CN106687141A (en) 2014-09-10 2017-05-17 麦迪穆有限责任公司 Pyrrolobenzodiazepines and conjugates thereof
GB201416112D0 (en) 2014-09-12 2014-10-29 Medimmune Ltd Pyrrolobenzodiazepines and conjugates thereof
AU2015339012B2 (en) 2014-10-31 2020-11-05 Abbvie Biotherapeutics Inc. Anti-CS1 antibodies and antibody drug conjugates
JP6878287B2 (en) 2014-11-25 2021-05-26 アーデーセー セラピューティクス ソシエテ アノニム Pyrrolobenzodiazepine-antibody conjugate
JP2018502839A (en) 2014-12-09 2018-02-01 アッヴィ・インコーポレイテッド Bcl-xL inhibitory compound and antibody drug conjugate containing the same
RU2017123942A (en) 2014-12-09 2019-01-11 Эббви Инк. BCL-XL INHIBITING COMPOUNDS WITH LOW CELL PERMEABILITY AND ANTIBODY MEDICINES CONJUGATES INCLUDING THEM
BR112017012377A2 (en) 2014-12-09 2018-04-24 Abbvie Inc antibody-drug conjugates with cell-permeable bcl-x1 inhibitors
WO2016100834A2 (en) 2014-12-19 2016-06-23 Ohmx Corporation Competitive enzymatic assays
MX2017012982A (en) 2015-04-10 2018-07-06 Univ Jefferson Methods and compositions for treating cancers and enhancing therapeutic immunity by selectively reducing immunomodulatory m2 monocytes.
GB201506402D0 (en) 2015-04-15 2015-05-27 Berkel Patricius H C Van And Howard Philip W Site-specific antibody-drug conjugates
GB201506411D0 (en) 2015-04-15 2015-05-27 Bergenbio As Humanized anti-axl antibodies
GB201506389D0 (en) 2015-04-15 2015-05-27 Berkel Patricius H C Van And Howard Philip W Site-specific antibody-drug conjugates
WO2017095808A1 (en) 2015-11-30 2017-06-08 Abbvie Inc. ANTI-huLRRC15 ANTIBODY DRUG CONJUGATES AND METHODS FOR THEIR USE
AU2016365114A1 (en) 2015-11-30 2018-05-17 Abbvie Biotherapeutics Inc. Anti-huLRRC15 antibody drug conjugates and methods for their use
GB201601431D0 (en) 2016-01-26 2016-03-09 Medimmune Ltd Pyrrolobenzodiazepines
GB201602356D0 (en) 2016-02-10 2016-03-23 Medimmune Ltd Pyrrolobenzodiazepine Conjugates
GB201602359D0 (en) 2016-02-10 2016-03-23 Medimmune Ltd Pyrrolobenzodiazepine Conjugates
GB201607478D0 (en) 2016-04-29 2016-06-15 Medimmune Ltd Pyrrolobenzodiazepine Conjugates
SI3626273T1 (en) 2016-05-17 2021-04-30 Abbvie Biotherapeutics Inc. Anti-cmet antibody drug conjugates and methods for their use
JP6751165B2 (en) 2016-06-08 2020-09-02 アッヴィ・インコーポレイテッド Anti-B7-H3 antibody and antibody drug conjugate
JP2019526529A (en) 2016-06-08 2019-09-19 アッヴィ・インコーポレイテッド Anti-B7-H3 antibody and antibody drug conjugate
AU2017277914A1 (en) 2016-06-08 2019-01-03 Abbvie Inc. Anti-CD98 antibodies and antibody drug conjugates
CR20180614A (en) 2016-06-08 2019-07-29 Abbvie Inc CONJUGATES OF ANTIBODY AND ANTI-EGFR DRUG
WO2017214462A2 (en) 2016-06-08 2017-12-14 Abbvie Inc. Anti-cd98 antibodies and antibody drug conjugates
EP3468599A2 (en) 2016-06-08 2019-04-17 AbbVie Inc. Anti-cd98 antibodies and antibody drug conjugates
AU2017277534A1 (en) 2016-06-08 2019-01-03 Abbvie Inc. Anti-EGFR antibody drug conjugates
CA3027173A1 (en) 2016-06-08 2017-12-14 Abbvie Inc. Anti-egfr antibody drug conjugates
EP3469000A1 (en) 2016-06-08 2019-04-17 AbbVie Inc. Anti-b7-h3 antibodies and antibody drug conjugates
GB201617466D0 (en) 2016-10-14 2016-11-30 Medimmune Ltd Pyrrolobenzodiazepine conjugates
GB201702031D0 (en) 2017-02-08 2017-03-22 Medlmmune Ltd Pyrrolobenzodiazepine-antibody conjugates
CA3047683C (en) 2017-02-08 2020-03-10 Adc Therapeutics Sa Pyrrolobenzodiazepine-antibody conjugates
DK3612537T3 (en) 2017-04-18 2022-08-08 Medimmune Ltd PYRROLOBENZODIAZEPIN CONJUGATES
PL3612234T3 (en) 2017-04-20 2024-09-02 Adc Therapeutics Sa Combination therapy with an anti-axl antibody-drug conjugate
BR112019026564A2 (en) 2017-06-14 2020-06-30 Adc Therapeutics Sa dosing regimens for administration of an anti-cd19 adc
CN111065638B (en) 2017-08-18 2021-04-09 麦迪穆有限责任公司 Pyrrolobenzodiazepine conjugates
GB201803342D0 (en) 2018-03-01 2018-04-18 Medimmune Ltd Methods
GB201806022D0 (en) 2018-04-12 2018-05-30 Medimmune Ltd Pyrrolobenzodiazepines and conjugates thereof
KR20210016390A (en) 2018-06-01 2021-02-15 노파르티스 아게 Binding molecules for BCMA and uses thereof
TW202016081A (en) 2018-06-21 2020-05-01 英商克拉德夫製藥有限公司 Small molecule modulators of human sting, conjugates and therapeutic applications
WO2020236797A1 (en) 2019-05-21 2020-11-26 Novartis Ag Variant cd58 domains and uses thereof
EP3972998A1 (en) 2019-05-21 2022-03-30 Novartis AG Cd19 binding molecules and uses thereof
GB201908128D0 (en) 2019-06-07 2019-07-24 Adc Therapeutics Sa Pyrrolobenzodiazepine-antibody conjugates
CN114269720A (en) 2019-07-25 2022-04-01 库拉德夫制药私人有限公司 acetyl-CoA synthetase short chains2(ACSS2) Small molecule inhibitors of
CN115315446A (en) 2020-03-06 2022-11-08 Go医疗股份有限公司 anti-sugar-CD 44 antibodies and uses thereof
US20230128499A1 (en) 2020-03-27 2023-04-27 Novartis Ag Bispecific combination therapy for treating proliferative diseases and autoimmune diseases
UY39610A (en) 2021-01-20 2022-08-31 Abbvie Inc ANTI-EGFR ANTIBODY-DRUG CONJUGATES
WO2022187591A1 (en) 2021-03-05 2022-09-09 Go Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-glyco-cd44 antibodies and their uses
EP4380604A1 (en) 2021-08-05 2024-06-12 Go Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-glyco-muc4 antibodies and their uses
AU2022339667A1 (en) 2021-09-03 2024-04-11 Go Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-glyco-cmet antibodies and their uses
CA3230933A1 (en) 2021-09-03 2023-03-09 Go Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-glyco-lamp1 antibodies and their uses
WO2024197151A2 (en) 2023-03-22 2024-09-26 Salubris Biotherapeutics, Inc. Anti-5t4 antigen binding domains, antibody-drug conjugates and methods of use thereof

Citations (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0642799A1 (en) * 1993-09-09 1995-03-15 BEHRINGWERKE Aktiengesellschaft Improved prodrugs for enzyme mediated activation
EP0648503A1 (en) * 1993-09-22 1995-04-19 BEHRINGWERKE Aktiengesellschaft Pro-prodrugs, their production and use
EP0665020A2 (en) * 1994-01-27 1995-08-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Method for preparing thioether conjugates
EP0693485A2 (en) * 1994-06-28 1996-01-24 Tanabe Seiyaku Co., Ltd. Baccatin derivatives and processes for preparing the same
WO1998013059A1 (en) * 1996-09-27 1998-04-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hydrolyzable prodrugs for delivery of anticancer drugs to metastatic cells
WO1998019705A1 (en) * 1996-11-05 1998-05-14 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Branched peptide linkers
US5965566A (en) * 1993-10-20 1999-10-12 Enzon, Inc. High molecular weight polymer-based prodrugs
WO2000034231A1 (en) * 1998-12-09 2000-06-15 La Jolla Pharmaceutical Company Molecular scaffolds acting as templates comprising carbamate linkages
WO2002026220A2 (en) * 2000-09-25 2002-04-04 University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill Taxoid conjugates as antimitotic and antitumor agents
EP1243276A1 (en) * 2001-03-23 2002-09-25 Franciscus Marinus Hendrikus De Groot Elongated and multiple spacers containing activatible prodrugs

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5827660A (en) 1996-08-09 1998-10-27 University Of Massachusetts Caged fluorochrome-labeled probes and subtraction of autoflourescence background
FI111758B (en) 1997-03-26 2003-09-15 Timo Korpela Use of lyoluminescence for analytical purposes
GB9909612D0 (en) 1999-04-26 1999-06-23 Cancer Res Campaign Tech N-protected amines and their use as prodrugs
WO2004019993A1 (en) 2002-08-30 2004-03-11 Ramot At Tel Aviv University Ltd. Self-immolative dendrimers releasing many active moieties upon a single activating event

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0642799A1 (en) * 1993-09-09 1995-03-15 BEHRINGWERKE Aktiengesellschaft Improved prodrugs for enzyme mediated activation
EP0647450A1 (en) * 1993-09-09 1995-04-12 BEHRINGWERKE Aktiengesellschaft Improved prodrugs for enzyme mediated activation
EP0648503A1 (en) * 1993-09-22 1995-04-19 BEHRINGWERKE Aktiengesellschaft Pro-prodrugs, their production and use
US5965566A (en) * 1993-10-20 1999-10-12 Enzon, Inc. High molecular weight polymer-based prodrugs
EP0665020A2 (en) * 1994-01-27 1995-08-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Method for preparing thioether conjugates
EP0693485A2 (en) * 1994-06-28 1996-01-24 Tanabe Seiyaku Co., Ltd. Baccatin derivatives and processes for preparing the same
WO1998013059A1 (en) * 1996-09-27 1998-04-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Hydrolyzable prodrugs for delivery of anticancer drugs to metastatic cells
WO1998019705A1 (en) * 1996-11-05 1998-05-14 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Branched peptide linkers
WO2000034231A1 (en) * 1998-12-09 2000-06-15 La Jolla Pharmaceutical Company Molecular scaffolds acting as templates comprising carbamate linkages
WO2002026220A2 (en) * 2000-09-25 2002-04-04 University Of North Carolina At Chapel Hill Taxoid conjugates as antimitotic and antitumor agents
EP1243276A1 (en) * 2001-03-23 2002-09-25 Franciscus Marinus Hendrikus De Groot Elongated and multiple spacers containing activatible prodrugs

Non-Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
93rd Annual Meeting of the American Association for Cancer Research; San Francisco, California, USA; April 06-10, 2002 *
APPENDINO G ET AL: "Synthesis of Paclitaxel (Docetaxel)/2-Deacetoxytaxinine J Dimers", TETRAHEDRON, ELSEVIER SCIENCE PUBLISHERS, AMSTERDAM, NL, vol. 55, no. 21, 21 May 1999 (1999-05-21), pages 6567 - 6576, XP004165623, ISSN: 0040-4020 *
DE GROOT FRANCISCUS M H ET AL: "Synthesis and Biological Evaluation of Novel Prodrugs of Anthracyclines for Selective Activation by the Tumor-Associated Protease Plasmin", JOURNAL OF MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY, AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY. WASHINGTON, US, vol. 42, no. 25, 1999, pages 5277 - 5283, XP002168683, ISSN: 0022-2623 *
DUBOWCHIK G M ET AL: "Cathepsin B-sensitive dipeptide prodrugs. 1. A model study of structural requirements for efficient release of doxorubicin", BIOORGANIC & MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY LETTERS, OXFORD, GB, vol. 8, no. 23, 1 December 1998 (1998-12-01), pages 3341 - 3346, XP004143755, ISSN: 0960-894X *
DUBOWCHIK G M ET AL: "Cathepsin B-sensitive dipeptide prodrugs. 2. models of anticancer drugs paclitaxel (Taxol<(>R)), mitomycin C and doxorubicin", BIOORGANIC & MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY LETTERS, OXFORD, GB, vol. 8, no. 23, 1 December 1998 (1998-12-01), pages 3347 - 3352, XP004143756, ISSN: 0960-894X *
GROOT DE F M H ET AL: "DESIGN, SYNTHESIS AND INITIAL BIOLOGICAL EVALUATION OF AN ALPHA VBETA3-INTEGRIN-TARGETED PLASMIN SENSITIVE DOXORUBICIN PRODRUG", PROCEEDINGS OF THE ANNUAL MEETING OF THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR CANCER RESEARCH, NEW YORK, NY, US, vol. 43, March 2002 (2002-03-01), pages 144,AN2059, XP001051142, ISSN: 0197-016X *
GROOT DE F M H ET AL: "IN VIVO EFFICACY OF SPACER-CONTAINING ANTITUMOR PRODRUGS OF DOXORUBICIN DESIGNED FOR SPECIFIC ACTIVATION BY TUMOR-ASSOCIATED PLASMIN", PROCEEDINGS OF THE ANNUAL MEETING OF THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR CANCER RESEARCH, NEW YORK, NY, US, vol. 43, March 2002 (2002-03-01), pages 415, XP008007701, ISSN: 0197-016X *
GROOT DE F M H ET AL: "Synthesis and Biological Evaluation of 2'-Carbamate-Linked and 2'-Carbonate-Linked Prodrugs of Paclitaxel: Selective Activation by the Tumor-Associated Protease Plasmin", JOURNAL OF MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY, AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY. WASHINGTON, US, vol. 43, 2000, pages 3093 - 3102, XP002212034, ISSN: 0022-2623 *
GROOT DE FRANCISCUS M H ET AL: "Elongated Multiple Electronic Cascade and Cyclization Spacer Systems in Activatible Anticancer Prodrugs for Enhanced Drug Release", JOURNAL OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY. EASTON, US, vol. 66, 2001, pages 8815 - 8830, XP002212035, ISSN: 0022-3263 *
KAR A K A K ET AL: "Synthesis and evaluation of daunorubicin-paclitaxel dimers", BIOORGANIC & MEDICINAL CHEMISTRY LETTERS, OXFORD, GB, vol. 10, no. 3, February 2000 (2000-02-01), pages 261 - 264, XP004188830, ISSN: 0960-894X *
See also references of EP1560599A1 *

Cited By (274)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1579873A1 (en) * 2004-03-23 2005-09-28 Complex Biosystems GmbH Polymeric prodrugs
EP2087910A2 (en) 2004-03-23 2009-08-12 Complex Biosystems GmbH Polymeric prodrugs
US9238686B2 (en) 2004-03-23 2016-01-19 Ascendis Pharma Gmbh Polymeric prodrug with self-immolative linker
US8377917B2 (en) 2004-03-23 2013-02-19 Complex Biosystems Gmbh Polymeric prodrug with a self-immolative linker
WO2005099768A3 (en) * 2004-03-23 2006-08-10 Complex Biosystems Gmbh Polymeric prodrug with a self-immolative linker
WO2005099768A2 (en) * 2004-03-23 2005-10-27 Complex Biosystems Gmbh Polymeric prodrug with a self-immolative linker
US8399403B2 (en) 2004-05-19 2013-03-19 Medarex, Inc. Chemical linkers and conjugates thereof
EP2594291A1 (en) * 2004-07-05 2013-05-22 Ascendis Pharma GmbH Hydrogel
WO2006003014A2 (en) * 2004-07-05 2006-01-12 Complex Biosystems Gmbh Hydrogel polymeric conjugates of a prodrug
US10029015B2 (en) 2004-07-05 2018-07-24 Ascendis Pharma A/S Hydrogel formulations
US7968085B2 (en) 2004-07-05 2011-06-28 Ascendis Pharma A/S Hydrogel formulations
WO2006003014A3 (en) * 2004-07-05 2007-01-11 Complex Biosystems Gmbh Hydrogel polymeric conjugates of a prodrug
EP2111872A3 (en) * 2004-07-05 2009-12-23 Complex Biosystems GmbH Hydrogel polymeric conjugates of a prodrug
US9056126B2 (en) 2004-07-05 2015-06-16 Ascendis Pharma A/S Hydrogel formulations
EP1625856A1 (en) * 2004-08-13 2006-02-15 Complex Biosystems GmbH Hydrogel polymeric conjugates of a prodrug
EP1625855A1 (en) * 2004-08-13 2006-02-15 Complex Biosystems GmbH Polymeric prodrug with a self-immolative linker
EP3088004A1 (en) 2004-09-23 2016-11-02 Genentech, Inc. Cysteine engineered antibodies and conjugates
US8980242B2 (en) 2005-06-22 2015-03-17 Ascendis Pharma Gmbh Aliphatic prodrug linker
WO2007018431A2 (en) * 2005-08-05 2007-02-15 Syntarga B.V. Triazole-containing releasable linkers and conjugates comprising the same
AU2006277117B2 (en) * 2005-08-05 2013-01-10 Syntarga B.V. Triazole-containing releasable linkers and conjugates comprising the same
US8158590B2 (en) 2005-08-05 2012-04-17 Syntarga B.V. Triazole-containing releasable linkers, conjugates thereof, and methods of preparation
JP2009509918A (en) * 2005-08-05 2009-03-12 シンタルガ・ビーブイ Triazole-containing releasable linkers, their conjugates, and production methods
WO2007018431A3 (en) * 2005-08-05 2008-06-05 Syntarga Bv Triazole-containing releasable linkers and conjugates comprising the same
EP2354163A2 (en) 2005-09-26 2011-08-10 Medarex, Inc. Conjugates of duocarmycin and anti-CD70 or anti-PSMA antibodies
US7968586B2 (en) 2005-11-10 2011-06-28 Medarex, Inc. Cytotoxic compounds and conjugates
EP2446904A2 (en) 2006-05-30 2012-05-02 Genentech, Inc. Anti-CD22 antibodies, their immunoconjugates and uses thereof
EP2447282A2 (en) 2006-05-30 2012-05-02 Genentech, Inc. Anti-CD22 Antibodies, their Immunoconjugates and uses thereof
EP2845866A1 (en) 2006-10-27 2015-03-11 Genentech, Inc. Antibodies and immunoconjugates and uses therefor
EP2474557A2 (en) 2007-07-16 2012-07-11 Genentech, Inc. Anti-CD79b antibodies and immunoconjugates and methods of use
EP2641618A2 (en) 2007-07-16 2013-09-25 Genentech, Inc. Humanized anti-CD79B antibodies and immunoconjugates and methods of use
EP2502937A2 (en) 2007-07-16 2012-09-26 Genentech, Inc. Anti-CD 79b Antibodies And Immunoconjugates And Methods Of Use
US9901567B2 (en) 2007-08-01 2018-02-27 Syntarga B.V. Substituted CC-1065 analogs and their conjugates
WO2009017394A1 (en) 2007-08-01 2009-02-05 Syntarga B.V. Substituted cc-1065 analogs and their conjugates
EP2657253A2 (en) 2008-01-31 2013-10-30 Genentech, Inc. Anti-CD79b antibodies and immunoconjugates and methods of use
EP4427805A2 (en) 2008-01-31 2024-09-11 Genentech, Inc. Anti-cd79b antibodies and immunoconjugates and methods of use
EP3050576A1 (en) 2008-04-29 2016-08-03 Ascendis Pharma Growth Disorders Division A/S Pegylated recombinant human growth hormone compounds
US10098930B2 (en) 2008-04-29 2018-10-16 Ascendis Pharma Endocrinology Division A/S PEGylated Recombinant Human Growth Hormone Compounds
US10960053B2 (en) 2008-04-29 2021-03-30 Ascendis Pharma Endocrinology Division A/S PEGylated recombinant human growth hormone compounds
US9272048B2 (en) 2008-04-29 2016-03-01 Ascendis Pharma Growth Disorders Division A/S PEGylated recombinant human growth hormone compounds
US8597631B2 (en) 2008-05-23 2013-12-03 Ktb Tumorforschungsgesellschaft Mbh Linear self-eliminating oligomers
EP2123305A1 (en) * 2008-05-23 2009-11-25 KTB Tumorforschungsgesellschaft mbH Linear self-eliminating oligomers
WO2009141050A3 (en) * 2008-05-23 2010-01-14 Ktb Tumorforschungsgesellschaft Mbh Linear self-eliminating oligomers
WO2009141050A2 (en) * 2008-05-23 2009-11-26 Ktb Tumorforschungsgesellschaft Mbh Linear self-eliminating oligomers
WO2010100220A1 (en) 2009-03-05 2010-09-10 Ascendis Pharma As Interferon alpha carrier prodrugs
WO2010120561A1 (en) 2009-04-01 2010-10-21 Genentech, Inc. Anti-fcrh5 antibodies and immunoconjugates and methods of use
US9457066B2 (en) 2009-07-31 2016-10-04 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Prodrugs comprising an insulin linker conjugate
US9138462B2 (en) 2009-07-31 2015-09-22 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Prodrugs comprising an insulin linker conjugate
US9265723B2 (en) 2009-07-31 2016-02-23 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Long acting insulin composition
US9493578B2 (en) 2009-09-02 2016-11-15 Xencor, Inc. Compositions and methods for simultaneous bivalent and monovalent co-engagement of antigens
EP3778917A2 (en) 2009-12-04 2021-02-17 F. Hoffmann-La Roche AG Multispecific antibodies, antibody analogs, compositions, and methods
US10682395B2 (en) 2009-12-15 2020-06-16 Ascendis Pharma Endocrinology Division A/S Dry growth hormone composition transiently linked to a polymer carrier
US9919033B2 (en) 2009-12-15 2018-03-20 Ascendis Pharma Endocrinology Division A/S Dry growth hormone composition transiently linked to a polymer carrier
WO2011073234A2 (en) 2009-12-15 2011-06-23 Ascendis Pharma As Growth hormone composition
US9511122B2 (en) 2009-12-15 2016-12-06 Ascendis Pharma Growth Disorders Division A/S Dry growth hormone composition transiently linked to a polymer carrier
WO2011089215A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2011-07-28 Ascendis Pharma As Dipeptide-based prodrug linkers for aromatic amine-containing drugs
WO2011089216A1 (en) 2010-01-22 2011-07-28 Ascendis Pharma As Dipeptide-based prodrug linkers for aliphatic amine-containing drugs
US9533056B2 (en) 2010-01-22 2017-01-03 Ascendis Pharma As Dipeptide-based prodrug linkers for aliphatic amine-containing drugs
US9062094B2 (en) 2010-01-22 2015-06-23 Ascendis Pharma As Dipeptide-based prodrug linkers for aliphatic amine-containing drugs
WO2011133039A2 (en) 2010-04-21 2011-10-27 Syntarga B.V. Novel conjugates of cc-1065 analogs and bifunctional linkers
EP3056203A1 (en) 2010-04-21 2016-08-17 Syntarga B.V. Conjugates of cc-1065 analogs and bifunctional linkers
EP3108886A2 (en) 2010-04-21 2016-12-28 Syntarga B.V. Conjugates of cc-1065 analogs and bifunctional linkers
WO2011147982A2 (en) 2010-05-27 2011-12-01 Genmab A/S Monoclonal antibodies against her2 epitope
EP3539988A2 (en) 2010-05-27 2019-09-18 Genmab A/S Monoclonal antibodies against her2
WO2011147986A1 (en) 2010-05-27 2011-12-01 Genmab A/S Monoclonal antibodies against her2
WO2011153346A1 (en) 2010-06-03 2011-12-08 Genentech, Inc. Immuno-pet imaging of antibodies and immunoconjugates and uses therefor
US8771966B2 (en) 2010-06-03 2014-07-08 Genentech, Inc. Immuno-PET imaging of antibodies and immunoconjugates and uses therefor
EP4434550A2 (en) 2010-06-15 2024-09-25 Genmab A/S Human antibody drug conjugates against tissue culture
EP3281956A2 (en) 2010-06-15 2018-02-14 Genmab A/S Human antibody drug conjugates against tissue factor
WO2011157741A2 (en) 2010-06-15 2011-12-22 Genmab A/S Human antibody drug conjugates against tissue factor
WO2012016227A2 (en) 2010-07-29 2012-02-02 Xencor, Inc. Antibodies with modified isoelectric points
US9605061B2 (en) 2010-07-29 2017-03-28 Xencor, Inc. Antibodies with modified isoelectric points
EP3029066A2 (en) 2010-07-29 2016-06-08 Xencor, Inc. Antibodies with modified isoelectric points
US9133276B2 (en) 2010-09-17 2015-09-15 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Prodrugs comprising an exendin linker conjugate
WO2012045085A1 (en) 2010-10-01 2012-04-05 Oxford Biotherapeutics Ltd. Anti-rori antibodies
EP3828205A1 (en) 2010-10-01 2021-06-02 Oxford BioTherapeutics Ltd Anti-ror1 antibodies
EP3219731A1 (en) 2010-10-01 2017-09-20 Oxford BioTherapeutics Ltd Anti-ror1 antibodies
EP3284755A1 (en) 2010-12-30 2018-02-21 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Conjugated anti-cd38 antibodies
WO2012092616A1 (en) 2010-12-30 2012-07-05 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Conjugated anti-cd38 antibodies
EP3798231A1 (en) 2010-12-30 2021-03-31 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Conjugated anti-cd38 antibodies
EP3763740A1 (en) 2011-01-26 2021-01-13 Celldex Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-kit antibodies and uses thereof
WO2012143523A1 (en) 2011-04-20 2012-10-26 Genmab A/S Bispecifc antibodies against her2
EP3970746A2 (en) 2011-07-06 2022-03-23 Genmab B.V. Polypeptide variants and uses thereof
WO2013004842A2 (en) 2011-07-06 2013-01-10 Genmab A/S Antibody variants and uses thereof
WO2013022855A1 (en) 2011-08-05 2013-02-14 Xencor, Inc. Antibodies with modified isoelectric points and immunofiltering
EP3611187A1 (en) 2011-10-10 2020-02-19 Xencor, Inc. A method for purifying antibodies
WO2013055809A1 (en) 2011-10-10 2013-04-18 Xencor, Inc. A method for purifying antibodies
US10851178B2 (en) 2011-10-10 2020-12-01 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric human IgG1 polypeptides with isoelectric point modifications
US10035818B2 (en) 2011-11-03 2018-07-31 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Polyethylene glycol based prodrug of adrenomedullin and use thereof
EP3075395A1 (en) 2011-11-03 2016-10-05 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Polyethylene glycol based prodrug of adrenomedullin and use thereof
US9315543B2 (en) 2011-11-03 2016-04-19 Bayer Intellectual Property Gmbh Tyrosine based linkers for the releasable connection of peptides
US9649363B2 (en) 2011-11-03 2017-05-16 Bayer Intellectual Property Gmbh Polyethylene glycol based prodrug of adrenomedullin and use thereof
WO2013064455A1 (en) 2011-11-03 2013-05-10 Bayer Intellectual Property Gmbh Tyrosine based linkers for the releasable connection of peptides
WO2013064508A1 (en) 2011-11-03 2013-05-10 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Polyethylene glycol based prodrug of adrenomedullin and use thereof
US9603936B2 (en) 2011-11-03 2017-03-28 Bayer Intellectual Property Gmbh Polyethylene glycol based prodrug of adrenomedullin and use thereof
US10675359B2 (en) 2011-12-23 2020-06-09 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of antibodies
WO2013092983A2 (en) 2011-12-23 2013-06-27 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of polypeptides
WO2013092998A1 (en) 2011-12-23 2013-06-27 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of antibodies
US9764038B2 (en) 2011-12-23 2017-09-19 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of antibodies
US9717803B2 (en) 2011-12-23 2017-08-01 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of polypeptides
US10071074B2 (en) 2012-04-05 2018-09-11 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Thieno-indole moieties and methods of treating using the same
WO2013149946A1 (en) 2012-04-05 2013-10-10 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Functionalized thieno-indole derivatives for the treatment of cancer
EP3587426A1 (en) 2012-04-05 2020-01-01 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.r.l. New alkylating agents
WO2013149948A1 (en) 2012-04-05 2013-10-10 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. New alkylating agents
US9527863B2 (en) 2012-04-05 2016-12-27 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Thieno-indole moieties and methods of treating using the same
US9561290B2 (en) 2012-04-05 2017-02-07 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Functionalized thieno-indole derivatives for the treatment of cancer
EP3632462A1 (en) 2012-07-06 2020-04-08 Genmab B.V. Dimeric protein with triple mutations
WO2014006217A1 (en) 2012-07-06 2014-01-09 Genmab B.V. Dimeric protein with triple mutations
US10132799B2 (en) 2012-07-13 2018-11-20 Innate Pharma Screening of conjugated antibodies
WO2014009426A2 (en) 2012-07-13 2014-01-16 Innate Pharma Screening of conjugated antibodies
EP3381943A1 (en) 2012-07-25 2018-10-03 Celldex Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-kit antibodies and uses thereof
EP4063391A1 (en) 2012-07-25 2022-09-28 Celldex Therapeutics, Inc. Anti-kit antibodies and uses thereof
WO2014018625A1 (en) 2012-07-25 2014-01-30 Kolltan Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Anti-kit antibodies and uses thereof
US9556192B2 (en) 2012-10-30 2017-01-31 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Functionalized 9-bromo-camptothecin derivatives
EP3564259A2 (en) 2012-11-09 2019-11-06 Innate Pharma Recognition tags for tgase-mediated conjugation
US10036010B2 (en) 2012-11-09 2018-07-31 Innate Pharma Recognition tags for TGase-mediated conjugation
US10918735B2 (en) 2012-12-04 2021-02-16 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Substituted pyrazino[1′,2′:1,5]pyrrolo[2,3-b]indole-1,4-diones for cancer treatment
US9943610B2 (en) 2012-12-21 2018-04-17 Bioalliance C.V. Hydrophilic self-immolative linkers and conjugates thereof
WO2014108198A1 (en) 2013-01-10 2014-07-17 Genmab B.V. Human igg1 fc region variants and uses thereof
EP4434543A2 (en) 2013-01-10 2024-09-25 Genmab B.V. Human igg1 fc region variants and uses thereof
US11634506B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2023-04-25 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
US10738133B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2020-08-11 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
US10738132B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2020-08-11 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
US11718667B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2023-08-08 Xencor, Inc. Optimized antibody variable regions
US11053316B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2021-07-06 Xencor, Inc. Optimized antibody variable regions
US10472427B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2019-11-12 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
US10487155B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2019-11-26 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
US9701759B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2017-07-11 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
US10131710B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2018-11-20 Xencor, Inc. Optimized antibody variable regions
US9650446B2 (en) 2013-01-14 2017-05-16 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
WO2014113510A1 (en) 2013-01-15 2014-07-24 Xencor, Inc. Rapid clearance of antigen complexes using novel antibodies
US9738722B2 (en) 2013-01-15 2017-08-22 Xencor, Inc. Rapid clearance of antigen complexes using novel antibodies
US10968276B2 (en) 2013-03-12 2021-04-06 Xencor, Inc. Optimized anti-CD3 variable regions
US11814423B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2023-11-14 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
US9605084B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2017-03-28 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
US11299554B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2022-04-12 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
US10611824B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-04-07 Innate Pharma Solid phase TGase-mediated conjugation of antibodies
US10544187B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-01-28 Xencor, Inc. Targeting regulatory T cells with heterodimeric proteins
EP3936521A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2022-01-12 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
EP3590922A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-01-08 Zymeworks Inc. Cytotoxic and anti-mitotic compounds, and methods of using the same
US10287364B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-05-14 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
WO2014145806A2 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
EP3421495A2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-01-02 Xencor, Inc. Modulation of t cells with bispecific antibodies and fc fusions
WO2014140300A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 Innate Pharma Solid phase tgase-mediated conjugation of antibodies
WO2014144871A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2014-09-18 The Centre For Drug Research And Development Cytotoxic and anti-mitotic compounds, and methods of using the same
US10106624B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2018-10-23 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
US10858417B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-12-08 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
EP3587448A1 (en) 2013-03-15 2020-01-01 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric proteins
US10519242B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2019-12-31 Xencor, Inc. Targeting regulatory T cells with heterodimeric proteins
US10071169B2 (en) 2013-06-20 2018-09-11 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of polypeptides
US9427478B2 (en) 2013-06-21 2016-08-30 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of polypeptides
US10434180B2 (en) 2013-06-21 2019-10-08 Innate Pharma Enzymatic conjugation of polypeptides
US10266547B2 (en) 2013-09-25 2019-04-23 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Thieno[2,3-e]indole derivatives as new antitumor agents
WO2015052537A1 (en) 2013-10-11 2015-04-16 Oxford Biotherapeutics Ltd Conjugated antibodies against ly75 for the treatment of cancer
WO2015095953A1 (en) 2013-12-27 2015-07-02 The Centre For Drug Research And Development Sulfonamide-containing linkage systems for drug conjugates
WO2015149077A1 (en) 2014-03-28 2015-10-01 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific antibodies that bind to cd38 and cd3
US10858451B2 (en) 2014-03-28 2020-12-08 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific antibodies that bind to CD38 and CD3
US9822186B2 (en) 2014-03-28 2017-11-21 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific antibodies that bind to CD38 and CD3
US11840579B2 (en) 2014-03-28 2023-12-12 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific antibodies that bind to CD38 and CD3
EP3954713A2 (en) 2014-03-28 2022-02-16 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific antibodies that bind to cd38 and cd3
EP3699195A2 (en) 2014-03-28 2020-08-26 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific antibodies that bind to cd38 and cd3
US9950077B2 (en) 2014-06-20 2018-04-24 Bioalliance C.V. Anti-folate receptor alpha (FRA) antibody-drug conjugates and methods of using thereof
EP3763738A1 (en) 2014-07-11 2021-01-13 Genmab A/S Antibodies binding axl
WO2016005593A1 (en) 2014-07-11 2016-01-14 Genmab A/S Antibodies binding axl
WO2016014984A1 (en) 2014-07-24 2016-01-28 Xencor, Inc. Rapid clearance of antigen complexes using novel antibodies
WO2016041082A1 (en) 2014-09-17 2016-03-24 CDRD Ventures, Inc. Cytotoxic and anti-mitotic compounds, and methods of using the same
EP4029873A1 (en) 2014-09-17 2022-07-20 Zymeworks Inc. Cytotoxic and anti-mitotic compounds, and methods of using the same
WO2016046301A1 (en) 2014-09-26 2016-03-31 Bayer Pharma Aktiengesellschaft Stabilized adrenomedullin derivatives and use thereof
WO2016071418A1 (en) 2014-11-05 2016-05-12 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Functionalized morpholinyl anthracycline derivatives
US12133883B2 (en) 2014-11-18 2024-11-05 Ascendis Pharma Endocrinology Division A/S Polymeric hGH prodrugs
US12016903B2 (en) 2014-11-21 2024-06-25 Ascendis Pharma Endocrinology Division A/S Long-acting growth hormone treatment
US11111315B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2021-09-07 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and tumor antigens
US9856327B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2018-01-02 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies to CD3 X CD123
US11352442B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2022-06-07 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and CD38
US11945880B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2024-04-02 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and tumor antigens
US11859011B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2024-01-02 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and tumor antigens
US10913803B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2021-02-09 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and tumor antigens
US11673972B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2023-06-13 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and tumor antigens
US9850320B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2017-12-26 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies to CD3 X CD20
US10259887B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2019-04-16 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and tumor antigens
US10526417B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2020-01-07 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and CD38
US12129309B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2024-10-29 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and CD38
US10889653B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2021-01-12 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and tumor antigens
US11225528B2 (en) 2014-11-26 2022-01-18 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and tumor antigens
US10428155B2 (en) 2014-12-22 2019-10-01 Xencor, Inc. Trispecific antibodies
US10227411B2 (en) 2015-03-05 2019-03-12 Xencor, Inc. Modulation of T cells with bispecific antibodies and FC fusions
WO2016141387A1 (en) 2015-03-05 2016-09-09 Xencor, Inc. Modulation of t cells with bispecific antibodies and fc fusions
US11091548B2 (en) 2015-03-05 2021-08-17 Xencor, Inc. Modulation of T cells with bispecific antibodies and Fc fusions
EP3730520A1 (en) 2015-07-10 2020-10-28 Genmab A/S Axl-specific antibody-drug conjugates for cancer treatment
US10174048B2 (en) 2015-07-21 2019-01-08 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Asymmetric process for the preparation of thieno-indoles derivatives
US10556913B2 (en) 2015-07-21 2020-02-11 Nerviano Medical Sciences S.R.L. Asymmetric process for the preparation of thieno-indoles derivatives
US10227410B2 (en) 2015-12-07 2019-03-12 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and PSMA
US11623957B2 (en) 2015-12-07 2023-04-11 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and PSMA
US10472422B2 (en) 2016-01-08 2019-11-12 Abgenomics International Inc. Tetravalent anti-PSGL-1 antibodies and uses thereof
WO2017121877A1 (en) 2016-01-13 2017-07-20 Genmab A/S Axl-specific antibody-drug conjugates for cancer treatment
US10918627B2 (en) 2016-05-11 2021-02-16 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Convergent and enantioselective total synthesis of Communesin analogs
CN106083769A (en) * 2016-06-12 2016-11-09 南京医科大学 A kind of reduce response prodrugs of paclitaxel and prepare nano-micelle carrier method
US11236170B2 (en) 2016-06-14 2022-02-01 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific checkpoint inhibitor antibodies
US11492407B2 (en) 2016-06-14 2022-11-08 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific checkpoint inhibitor antibodies
US10787518B2 (en) 2016-06-14 2020-09-29 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific checkpoint inhibitor antibodies
WO2018004338A1 (en) 2016-06-27 2018-01-04 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Cleavable tetrazine used in bio-orthogonal drug activation
US11225521B2 (en) 2016-06-28 2022-01-18 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind somatostatin receptor 2
US10316088B2 (en) 2016-06-28 2019-06-11 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind somatostatin receptor 2
US12054545B2 (en) 2016-06-28 2024-08-06 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind somatostatin receptor 2
US10793632B2 (en) 2016-08-30 2020-10-06 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific immunomodulatory antibodies that bind costimulatory and checkpoint receptors
US10550185B2 (en) 2016-10-14 2020-02-04 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific heterodimeric fusion proteins containing IL-15-IL-15Rα Fc-fusion proteins and PD-1 antibody fragments
US10501543B2 (en) 2016-10-14 2019-12-10 Xencor, Inc. IL15/IL15Rα heterodimeric Fc-fusion proteins
WO2018083126A1 (en) 2016-11-01 2018-05-11 Genmab B.V. Polypeptide variants and uses thereof
WO2018138032A2 (en) 2017-01-24 2018-08-02 Innate Pharma NKp46 BINDING AGENTS
WO2018141959A1 (en) 2017-02-06 2018-08-09 Innate Pharma Immunomodulatory antibody drug conjugates binding to a human mica polypeptide
EP4257614A2 (en) 2017-03-10 2023-10-11 Berlin-Chemie AG Pharmaceutical combinations comprising an anti-ly75 antibody
US11365258B2 (en) 2017-03-10 2022-06-21 Berlin-Chemie Ag Pharmaceutical combinations comprising an anti-LY75 antibody
WO2018199337A1 (en) 2017-04-28 2018-11-01 味の素株式会社 Compound having substance that has affinity for soluble protein, cleavable moiety, and reactive group, or salt thereof
US11932650B2 (en) 2017-05-11 2024-03-19 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Potent agelastatin derivatives as modulators for cancer invasion and metastasis
US11084863B2 (en) 2017-06-30 2021-08-10 Xencor, Inc. Targeted heterodimeric Fc fusion proteins containing IL-15 IL-15alpha and antigen binding domains
US12128110B2 (en) 2017-09-19 2024-10-29 Paul Scherrer Institut Transglutaminase conjugation method and linker
US10640508B2 (en) 2017-10-13 2020-05-05 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Diazene directed modular synthesis of compounds with quaternary carbon centers
US11312770B2 (en) 2017-11-08 2022-04-26 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific and monospecific antibodies using novel anti-PD-1 sequences
US10981992B2 (en) 2017-11-08 2021-04-20 Xencor, Inc. Bispecific immunomodulatory antibodies that bind costimulatory and checkpoint receptors
WO2019092148A1 (en) 2017-11-10 2019-05-16 Innate Pharma Antibodies with functionalized glutamine residues
US11319355B2 (en) 2017-12-19 2022-05-03 Xencor, Inc. Engineered IL-2 Fc fusion proteins
WO2019145455A1 (en) 2018-01-24 2019-08-01 Genmab B.V. Polypeptide variants and uses thereof
US10982006B2 (en) 2018-04-04 2021-04-20 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind fibroblast activation protein
US11524991B2 (en) 2018-04-18 2022-12-13 Xencor, Inc. PD-1 targeted heterodimeric fusion proteins containing IL-15/IL-15Ra Fc-fusion proteins and PD-1 antigen binding domains and uses thereof
US11505595B2 (en) 2018-04-18 2022-11-22 Xencor, Inc. TIM-3 targeted heterodimeric fusion proteins containing IL-15/IL-15RA Fc-fusion proteins and TIM-3 antigen binding domains
WO2019212356A1 (en) 2018-05-04 2019-11-07 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B .V. Tetrazines for high click conjugation yield in vivo and high click release yield
EP4382167A2 (en) 2018-05-04 2024-06-12 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Compounds comprising a linker for increasing transcyclooctene stability
WO2019212357A1 (en) 2018-05-04 2019-11-07 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Compounds comprising a linker for increasing transcyclooctene stability
WO2019240287A1 (en) 2018-06-14 2019-12-19 味の素株式会社 Compound comprising substance having affinity for antibody, cleavage site and reactive group, or salt thereof
EP4406975A2 (en) 2018-06-14 2024-07-31 Ajinomoto Co., Inc. Compound having affinity substance to antibody and bioorthogonal functional group, or salt thereof
WO2019238843A1 (en) 2018-06-14 2019-12-19 Berlin-Chemie Ag Pharmaceutical combinations
WO2019240288A1 (en) 2018-06-14 2019-12-19 味の素株式会社 Substance having affinity for antibody, and compound or salt thereof having bioorthogonal functional group
WO2020010079A2 (en) 2018-07-02 2020-01-09 Amgen Inc. Anti-steap1 antigen-binding protein
US11530274B2 (en) 2018-07-02 2022-12-20 Amgen Inc. Anti-STEAP1 antigen-binding protein
CN109134516A (en) * 2018-08-27 2019-01-04 苏州大学 A kind of dimer prodrug and a kind of light regulation Nano medication and application with tumor microenvironment response
CN109134516B (en) * 2018-08-27 2022-02-11 苏州大学 Dimer prodrug with tumor microenvironment response, light-controlled nano-drug and application
US11358999B2 (en) 2018-10-03 2022-06-14 Xencor, Inc. IL-12 heterodimeric Fc-fusion proteins
WO2020090979A1 (en) 2018-10-31 2020-05-07 味の素株式会社 Compound comprising substance with affinity for antibody, cleavage site and reactive group, or salt thereof
US11472890B2 (en) 2019-03-01 2022-10-18 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind ENPP3 and CD3
US11535634B2 (en) 2019-06-05 2022-12-27 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Compounds, conjugates, and compositions of epipolythiodiketopiperazines and polythiodiketopiperazines and uses thereof
WO2020256544A1 (en) 2019-06-17 2020-12-24 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Tetrazines for high click release speed and yield
EP4382129A2 (en) 2019-06-17 2024-06-12 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Compounds for fast and efficient click release
EP4424713A2 (en) 2019-06-17 2024-09-04 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Agents for cleaving labels from biomolecules in vivo
WO2020256546A1 (en) 2019-06-17 2020-12-24 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Compounds for fast and efficient click release
WO2020256545A1 (en) 2019-06-17 2020-12-24 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Agents for cleaving labels from biomolecules in vivo
WO2020254197A1 (en) 2019-06-18 2020-12-24 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Adrenomedullin-analogues for long-term stabilization and their use
WO2021142086A1 (en) 2020-01-08 2021-07-15 Synthis Therapeutics, Inc. Alk5 inhibitor conjugates and uses thereof
WO2021151984A1 (en) 2020-01-31 2021-08-05 Innate Pharma Treatment of cancer
US11919956B2 (en) 2020-05-14 2024-03-05 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind prostate specific membrane antigen (PSMA) and CD3
WO2021251358A1 (en) 2020-06-09 2021-12-16 味の素株式会社 Modified ferritin and method for producing same
WO2022008419A1 (en) 2020-07-06 2022-01-13 Byondis B.V. Antifolate linker-drugs and antibody-drug conjugates
US11591401B2 (en) 2020-08-19 2023-02-28 Xencor, Inc. Anti-CD28 compositions
US11919958B2 (en) 2020-08-19 2024-03-05 Xencor, Inc. Anti-CD28 compositions
WO2022058594A1 (en) 2020-09-18 2022-03-24 Araris Biotech Ag Transglutaminase conjugation method with amino acid-based linkers
US12076412B2 (en) 2020-10-25 2024-09-03 Araris Biotech Ag Antibody-drug conjugates through specific linker oligopeptides
WO2022112356A1 (en) 2020-11-25 2022-06-02 Innate Pharma Treatment of cancer
WO2022154116A1 (en) 2021-01-18 2022-07-21 味の素株式会社 Compound or salt thereof, and antibody produced using same
WO2022154127A1 (en) 2021-01-18 2022-07-21 味の素株式会社 Compound or salt thereof, and antibody obtained therefrom
US12030888B2 (en) 2021-02-24 2024-07-09 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Himastatin derivatives, and processes of preparation thereof, and uses thereof
US11739144B2 (en) 2021-03-09 2023-08-29 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and CLDN6
US11859012B2 (en) 2021-03-10 2024-01-02 Xencor, Inc. Heterodimeric antibodies that bind CD3 and GPC3
WO2022191283A1 (en) 2021-03-11 2022-09-15 味の素株式会社 Compound or salt thereof, and antibody obtained using same
WO2022196675A1 (en) 2021-03-16 2022-09-22 味の素株式会社 Complex or salt thereof, and method for manufacturing same
WO2022248835A1 (en) 2021-05-26 2022-12-01 Oxford Biotherapeutics Ltd Pharmaceutical combination comprising an anti-cd205 antibody and an immune checkpoint inhibitor
WO2023275025A1 (en) 2021-06-28 2023-01-05 Byondis B.V. Conjugates comprising phosphoantigens and their use in therapy
WO2023054706A1 (en) 2021-09-30 2023-04-06 味の素株式会社 Conjugate of antibody and functional substance or salt thereof, and antibody derivative and compound or salts thereof to be used in producing conjugate or salt thereof
WO2023089314A1 (en) 2021-11-18 2023-05-25 Oxford Biotherapeutics Limited Pharmaceutical combinations
WO2023126297A1 (en) 2021-12-30 2023-07-06 Byondis B.V. Antifolate linker-drugs and antibody-drug conjugates
WO2023158305A1 (en) 2022-02-15 2023-08-24 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Masked il12 protein
EP4372000A2 (en) 2022-02-15 2024-05-22 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Masked il12 protein
WO2023227660A1 (en) 2022-05-25 2023-11-30 Innate Pharma Nectin-4 binding agents
WO2024080872A1 (en) 2022-10-12 2024-04-18 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Strained bicyclononenes
WO2024133374A1 (en) 2022-12-22 2024-06-27 Byondis B.V. Novel linker drugs comprising phosphoantigens, novel conjugates and their use in therapy
EP4427762A1 (en) 2023-03-10 2024-09-11 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Trans-cyclooctene with improved t-linker
WO2024191293A1 (en) 2023-03-10 2024-09-19 Tagworks Pharmaceuticals B.V. Trans-cyclooctene with improved t-linker

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2006507322A (en) 2006-03-02
CA2506080A1 (en) 2004-05-27
US20060116422A1 (en) 2006-06-01
EP1560599A1 (en) 2005-08-10
US7705045B2 (en) 2010-04-27
AU2003282624A1 (en) 2004-06-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7705045B2 (en) Prodrugs built as multiple self-elimination-release spacers
US7223837B2 (en) Elongated and multiple spacers in activatible prodrugs
JP4560210B2 (en) Drug complex
Groot et al. Anticancer prodrugs for application in monotherapy targeting hypoxia, tumor-associated enzymes, and receptors
ES2910941T3 (en) Fibroblast Activation Protein Ligands for Targeted Delivery Applications
ES2704199T3 (en) Dual action prodrugs
US7893023B2 (en) Prodrugs activated by plasmin and their use in cancer chemotherapy
CA2517459C (en) Heterobifunctional polymeric bioconjugates
AU2001275525B2 (en) Tripeptide prodrug compounds
US8158590B2 (en) Triazole-containing releasable linkers, conjugates thereof, and methods of preparation
EP1144011B1 (en) Prodrug compounds and process for preparation thereof
AU2001266853B2 (en) Prodrug compounds with an oligopeptide having an isoleucine residue
ES2260859T3 (en) POLYMER PROPHARMS WITH TRIALQUIL BLOCK FACILITATED FROM BIOACTIVE AGENTS CONTAINING AMINO.
ES2269397T3 (en) THERAPEUTIC AND DIAGNOSTIC BINDING SYSTEMS THAT INCLUDE UNION PROPERTIES TO TRANSPORT MOLECULES AND DRUGS THAT CONTAIN THEM.
AU2002257743A1 (en) Elongated and multiple spacers in activatible prodrugs
JP2010503706A (en) Lysine polymer linker
WO2008120098A2 (en) Peptide prodrugs
CN105188729B (en) Conjugates for protection against nephrotoxic active substances
JP2004504358A (en) Antineoplastic polymer conjugate
CA2411660C (en) Enzyme-cleavable prodrug compounds
US8597631B2 (en) Linear self-eliminating oligomers
Uddin et al. In Vitro Cytotoxicity and In Vivo Anti-Tumor Efficacy of CD13 Targeted Peptide-Monomethyl Auristatin E (MMAE) Conjugates

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): BW GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
REEP Request for entry into the european phase

Ref document number: 2003774383

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2003282624

Country of ref document: AU

Ref document number: 2003774383

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2506080

Country of ref document: CA

Ref document number: 928/CHENP/2005

Country of ref document: IN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2004551297

Country of ref document: JP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 2003774383

Country of ref document: EP

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2006116422

Country of ref document: US

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 10534777

Country of ref document: US

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 10534777

Country of ref document: US